JP5630529B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into a starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. Also, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game state winning, for example, after a display effect for one game has been executed, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed. Then, the payout of game balls according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device is executed.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined provision information, it is determined whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Is a grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, it is informed that the operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game operation being ended as one game time. Game times control means for controlling the means;
A period determining means for determining the duration of each game round;
With
In the gaming machine in which the game round ends when the duration determined by the period determining means has elapsed ,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start ball entering section, and a game is stored in the second start ball entering section. Special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the ball enters the ball is stored as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to determine the grant in order from the previously acquired second special information,
The gaming machine is
When the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored. Priority means for making the grant determination,
Information corresponding to a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
A state setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result;
In a situation where the special notification state is set, when the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit is performed when the special notification state is set. Notification control means for causing the special information to be specified by the destination specifying means to be executed at a timing prior to the special information being triggered by the execution of the special notification;
In the case where the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the grant determination for the number of times corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. Canceling means for canceling the special notification state when it is performed or when the determination result is notified;
Equipped with a,
The notification control means is configured to provide a special notification corresponding to the specified information based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying means in a situation where the game turning operation is performed. Execution means to be performed by the end timing of
Even if the special notification is made by the execution means by the end timing of the game turn operation, the duration of the game turn corresponding to the game play operation being executed is not changed. It is characterized by that.
Further, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 2 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
A starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined provision information, it is determined whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Is a grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, it is informed that the operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game operation being ended as one game time. Game times control means for controlling the means;
A period determining means for determining the duration of each game round;
With
In the gaming machine in which the game round ends when the duration determined by the period determining means has elapsed,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start ball entering section, and a game is stored in the second start ball entering section. Special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the ball enters the ball is stored as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to determine the grant in order from the previously acquired second special information,
The gaming machine is
When the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored. Priority means for making the grant determination,
Information corresponding to a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
A state setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result;
In the situation where the special notification state is set, when the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means triggered the setting of the special notification state. Notification control means to be executed in a situation in which the game times of the game times prior to the game times related to the special information are being performed;
When the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the number of the special notifications corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. A release means for canceling the special notification state when a game round related to execution is performed;
With
The notification control means is configured to provide a special notification corresponding to the specified information based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying means in a situation where the game turning operation is performed. Execution means to be performed by the end timing of
Even if the special notification is made by the execution means by the end timing of the game turn operation, the duration of the game turn corresponding to the game play operation being executed is not changed. It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to a game.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) The front view of the operating port apparatus which shows the case where an electrically-driven accessory is a closed state, (b) The front view of an operating-port apparatus which shows the case where an electric accessory is an open state. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery lottery etc. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd result display parts. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a holding ball storage area. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows the process for electronic role support. The flowchart which shows an electric utility opening / closing process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. The flowchart which shows the command response process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a pending | holding command response process. The flowchart which shows the update process at the time of winning a prize. The flowchart which shows a 1st setting process. The flowchart which shows a 2nd setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display control process. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a fluctuation | variation display pattern table. The flowchart which shows the process for change. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first stage correction table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second stage correction table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a third stage correction table. . The timing chart for demonstrating a mode when a change display pattern is corrected and a holding notice is performed. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation completion. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific aspect of a hold notice. The flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. The timing chart which shows a mode when the setting of the state which should perform a hold advance notice is performed triggered by the hold information which concerns on an upper operation port. The flowchart which shows the 1st setting process in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows the 1st setting process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. The timing chart which shows a mode when the setting of the state which should perform a hold advance notice is performed triggered by the hold information which concerns on an upper operation port.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown), a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame, and a back pack unit (not shown) arranged behind the inner frame.

  The inner frame of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions serving as a support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated forward by using one of the left and right side portions as a support side. Further, the back pack unit is rotatably supported by the inner frame, and can be rotated rearward with one of the left and right side portions as a support side.

  Note that the gaming machine body 12 is provided with a locking device (not shown) at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. In addition, the front door frame 14 has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 20 is mounted on the inner frame. Here, the structure of the game board 20 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 20.

  The game board 20 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 21, a variable winning device 22, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion or non-priority starting ball entering portion) 23, and a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion or priority starting ball) Part) 24, the through gate 25, the variable display unit 26, the main display part 33, the display part 34 for accessories, etc. are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 21, the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, and the lower operating port 24, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 20, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 21 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 22 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 23, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 24. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 24 with respect to the upper working port 23, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 24 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 23. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 22 with respect to each operating port 23, 24, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 22 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 23, 24.

  In addition, an out port 27 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 20, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 27. The game board 20 is provided with a large number of nails 28 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 27, the game ball enters the variable winning device 22, the upper operating port 23, the lower operating port 24 or the through gate 25. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 20. Both the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 23 and 24 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 23 is on the upper side. The lower working port 24 is provided with an electric accessory 24a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  Details of the electric accessory 24a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3A shows a case where the electric accessory 24a is in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state), and FIG. 3B is an open state (support state or guide state) of the electric accessory 24a. Shows the case.

  The working port case 23a constituting the upper working port 23 projects to the near side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, with the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the working port case 23a (that is, the left-right width of the upper working port 23) is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is when the electric accessory 24a is in a closed state. The length is longer than the distance between the left and right electric accessories 24a. Further, when the electric accessory 24a is in the closed state, the interval between the two operation openings 23 and 24 is set so that the distance between the operating port case 23a and the upper end of the electric accessory 24a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 24a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 24, and the electric operation item 24a is opened, so that the lower operation port 24 can be won. In particular, at this time, during the operation in which the electric accessory 24a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operation port case 23a of the upper operation port 23 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the winning combination 24a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 24, and winning can be achieved only when the electric accessory 24a is almost fully opened. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 23a and is bounced to the outside, and does not win the lower operating port 24 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 24a is opened in a very short time, it becomes extremely difficult to win the lower working port 24, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 24a is continued, Winning is easy.

  Furthermore, since the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are arranged side by side as described above, more specifically, the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 are arranged side by side. The game ball that has flowed down toward the upper side of the operating port device can win both the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24. In other words, when the electric accessory 24a is in the open state, it is difficult to aim for winning in the upper working port 23 and winning in the lower working port 24 depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 51 described later. It has become.

  In addition to the configuration in which the working port case 23a of the upper working port 23 is substantially trapezoidal as described above, the working port case 23a of the upper working port 23 has a two-stage configuration having a narrow upper portion and a lower wide portion, A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 23, or an obstruction nail may be planted obliquely below the working mouth case 23a.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a large winning opening 22a that leads to the back side of the game board 20, and an open / close door 22b that opens and closes the large winning opening 22a. The open / close door 22b is normally in a closed state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As a release mode of the variable winning device 22, the variable winning device 22 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 33 and the accessory display portion 34 are provided on a decorative member 29 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 29 extends from the board surface of the game board 20 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 29 faces the window panel 53 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the front surface of the decorative member 29.

  A main display unit 33 and an accessory display unit 34 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 29. That is, the main display unit 33 and the accessory display unit 34 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 53 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 33 and 34. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display section 33, when the variable winning device 22 is in the opening / closing execution mode (or in the opening / closing execution mode) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working opening 23, and the lower working opening 24 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first result display section AS, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the upper working port 23 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section BS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the lower operation port 24 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the lower operation port 24 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS, and the display is changed. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 33 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 33 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 33, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  The accessory display unit 34 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning to the through gate 25, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 25 as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 25 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 34 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 24a provided in the lower working port 24 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 26 is provided with a symbol display device 31 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of symbol. The variable display unit 26 is provided with a center frame 32 so as to surround the symbol display device 31. The center frame 32 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is reduced due to the fall of the game ball is not caused. .

  The symbol display device 31 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 31 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 31, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 31 is started based on winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 31 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 31 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 31 is set in advance to a game number of times that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 22a of the variable winning device 22 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  By the way, based on the winning at any one of the operating ports 23, 24, the variable display is started on the main display unit 33 and the symbol display device 31, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  A first holding lamp portion 35 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 31 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 32. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operating port 23 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 35 is turned on. A second holding lamp portion 36 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 31 is provided in the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 32. The maximum number of game balls won in the lower operation port 24 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp portion 36 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 32 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 35 and the second holding ramp portion 36 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  A third holding lamp portion 37 corresponding to the accessory display portion 34 is provided at the lower portion of the center frame 32. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 25 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 37. In addition, the structure etc. which each hold lamp | ramp parts 35-37 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 31 may be sufficient.

  An inner rail portion 41 and an outer rail portion 42 are attached to the game board 20, and a guide rail is configured by the inner rail portion 41 and the outer rail portion 42, and is mounted below the game board 20 in the inner frame. A game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area. The game ball launching mechanism launches a game ball by operating a launch handle 51 provided on the front door frame 14.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 52 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 52 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the above-described window panel 53 is fitted therein. The window panel 53 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent using a synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 52, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp part 54 is provided above the window part 52 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 54, speaker units 55 for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 52 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 56 and a lower bulging portion 57 that bulge to the near side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 56a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 56, and a lower plate 57a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 57. The upper plate 56a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 57a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 56a. The game balls paid out from the payout device mounted on the back pack unit are discharged to the upper plate 56a and the lower plate 57a.

  A main control device, an audio lamp control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, as described above, a back pack unit is provided on the back surface of the inner frame. The back pack unit includes a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, a power source and a firing control device. Is installed. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. In the main controller 60, a substrate box that accommodates the main control substrate 61 or the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are joined in an inseparable manner, and a structure of a joining portion (crushing portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer is attached to the object at the time of peeling. The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. In addition, it is good also as a structure which has a part of function which MPU62 has, for example, the function of ROM63, the function of RAM64, etc. as another element.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 62 are a power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main control device 60, a payout control device 70, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, and the like. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 80 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, and power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 65. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a prize-winning entry part (payout-corresponding entry part) such as a general prize opening 21, a variable prize winning device 22, an upper action opening 23, a lower action opening 24, a through gate 25 and the like. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 performs a winning determination (entrance determination) to each of the winning portions. In addition, the MPU 62 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winnings to the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 and also performs support occurrence lotteries based on winning to the through gate 25.

  A power failure monitoring board 65, a payout control device 70, and an audio lamp control device 90 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 70 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to. When the winning to the general winning opening 21 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 22 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 23 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 24. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 90. In this case, the command information storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive unit 22c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 22b of the variable winning device 22, an electric combination driving unit 24b that opens and closes the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, and a main display. The unit 33 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 22c so that the special winning opening 22a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 24a is won, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 24b so that the electric combination 24a is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 33 is executed in the MPU 62 and the main display section is operated in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 22. Display control of the round display part RS in 33 is executed.

  The power failure monitoring board 65 relays between the main control board 61 and the power supply and launch control device 80, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 60.

  The power source and launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61 and the payout control device 70, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply and launch control device 80 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 81, and the game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 90 is based on various commands input from the main control device 60, the holding lamp portions 35 to 37 provided in the variable display unit 26, the display lamp portion 54 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. In addition to controlling the drive of the unit 55, the display control device 100 is controlled.

  In the display control device 100, display control of the symbol display device 31 is executed based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 90. In this case, the voice lamp control device 90 determines the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 31 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands input from the main control device 60. The presence or absence of reach and the contents of reach production are determined.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 31 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 31.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of variable display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the display screen G is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  Further, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, all symbol rows Z1 in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination, specifically, a symbol combination that is out of reach is formed. The variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, and then a predetermined moving image is displayed. In addition, in the case of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, which will be described later, all symbol sequences in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination, specifically, a symbol combination that is out of reach is formed. The change display of Z1 to Z3 is finished, and then a predetermined moving image is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 31 is not limited to the above-described pattern. For example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 62 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 33, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 31, setting of display of the accessory display unit 34, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for lottery generation for jackpots, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining jackpot types such as a probable jackpot result and a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 31 moves out of place, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a first result display section AS of the main display section 33 And the second result display unit BS and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the symbol display device 31 are used. We are and. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. The RAM 64 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 64b composed of a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total number of reservations storage area. In the reserved ball storage area 64b, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 23, and the second result display unit of the RAM 64 is stored in the timing at which the game ball is won in the lower operation port 24. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 63a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 63. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the success / failure tables include a low / probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) of FIG. 7 (a) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high) of FIG. 7 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability correspondence state) and a high probability mode (high probability correspondence state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), there are two random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot. . On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 7B, there are 21 random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot. It is. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64 b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 23, and the second result display unit of the RAM 64 is stored in the timing at which the game ball is won in the lower operation port 24. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are: (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) the bottom after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 24a of the operating port 24.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 22 in the opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 22 can be controlled so that the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 22 is relatively high from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed 15 times (number of times for high frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 sec (high frequency time) ) Or until the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 22a reaches 10 (high frequency). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 22a is performed twice (number of times for low frequency) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Or until the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 22a reaches 6 (the number of low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 51 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is set so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 22a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 22a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  Note that the number of opening / closing of the large winning opening 22a in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 22 increases from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer or the opening limit number for one opening is set larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 22 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 22a are not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 22 does not occur substantially.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24, the electric combination 24a of the lower working port 24 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 24a is opened is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 24a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 24 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be generated in the upper operating port 23 than in the lower operating port 24, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 24 is connected to the lower operating port 24. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 24, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (for example, on the display part 34 based on a winning to the through gate 25) secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the first electrification opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, In this case, one condition or any combination of conditions is applied among shortening the average time of the reserved time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 63b as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 63. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the first result display unit in FIG. 8A and a second result display unit in FIG. 8B. A distribution table (second distribution information group) is set.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 8A, as the distribution destination of the game result, the normal jackpot result (low-probability corresponding special game result), the unspecified 2R probability variable jackpot result (non- Explicit high-probability corresponding game result or latent probability variation state), explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result (explicit high probability corresponding game result or sudden probability variation result), 15R probability variation jackpot result (high probability special game result) Has been.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / not-lotting mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state (special gaming state corresponding to low probability).

  The result of the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot is that the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained at the previous mode. It is a result. In other words, the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (non-explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state (explicit high probability corresponding gaming state).

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the gaming state is shifted to the 15R probability variation jackpot state (a special gaming state corresponding to high probability).

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” is unspecified. It corresponds to the 2R probability variation jackpot result, “15 to 19” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and “20 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result are set as the probability variation jackpot result, thereby diversifying the mode of the probability variation jackpot result. That is, when the three types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the next highest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that becomes the high-frequency support mode, and in the opening / closing execution mode the low-frequency winning mode is maintained and the previous mode is maintained The implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In particular, in the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the support mode is maintained in the previous mode, although the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. That is, when an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the normal gaming state, the support mode is maintained in the low frequency support mode although the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Then, as a gaming state, it is possible to create a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode even though the support mode of the electric accessory 24a is common in the low frequency support mode, It is possible to predict whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In addition, as a kind of losing result in the winning / losing lottery, a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not cause the shifting of the winning / losing lottery mode and the support mode may be included. In the configuration in which both the above-described non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. However, if one of the results of non-explicit 2R probability change jackpot or special outage occurs in the normal gaming state, for example, it will be It is possible to cause the player to predict which result actually corresponds to.

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the game result distribution destination. Of the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the game result distribution mode in the case of winning the jackpot is based on the winning win based on the winning at the upper operating port 23 and the winning at the lower operating port 24. It is different from the case of winning the jackpot based on.

  Here, regardless of whether the distribution table for the first result display section or the distribution table for the second result display section is used, the probability of a promiscuous jackpot result when the jackpot is won is the same. Yes. That is, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result is 20. ing. Further, in the distribution table for the second result display section, the number of values of the big hit type counter C2 assigned to the 15R probability variation big hit result is 20. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is determined based on whether the winning winning is based on the winning to the upper operating port 23 and the winning winning based on the winning to the lower operating port 24 (Specifically, 2/3).

  However, if a big win is won based on the winning of the lower working port 24 and a probable big hit result is generated, a 15R probable big win result is always obtained, whereas a big win is won based on the winning of the upper working port 23 and In the case of a probabilistic jackpot result, an unspecified 2R probable jackpot result or an explicit 2R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/4, and a 15R probable jackpot result with a probability of 1/2. In other words, the probability of occurrence of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the most advantageous for the player among the probability variation jackpot results, is higher when the jackpot win is won based on the winning to the lower operation port 24. It will be higher than if you win a jackpot based on winning.

  In addition, in the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends as described above, but since the support mode is maintained in the previous mode, the 15R probability variation jackpot result and explicit When compared with the 2R probability variation jackpot result, the chance of receiving a game ball is reduced by the fact that the electric accessory 24a is less likely to be in the open state, and further, the lottery based on the distribution table for the second result display section Is less likely to occur.

  As described above, the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 have a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Accordingly, the player plays a game while expecting that a winning will occur in the lower working port 24 among the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24, and accordingly, the winning frequency in the lower working port 24. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases becomes higher.

  In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, and the change of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24. More specifically, it is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 23, and the second result display unit of the RAM 64 is stored in the timing at which the game ball is won in the lower operation port 24. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 63, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) includes the symbol display device 31 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 22 is the high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 31 is started. This means a display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to be the special display result in the previous stage.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In the present pachinko machine 10, a combination of jackpot symbols means a combination of the same symbols.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 31. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 5 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 62 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 33 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 31. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 31.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 25. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 24a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 24a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 24a is not controlled to be in an open state.

  As already described, in the MPU 62, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. The variable display time table storage area 63c is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used for the determination.

<Configuration of holding ball storage area 64b>
Next, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 64b will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  The first result display section holding area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 23. This is a reserved area for storing each value in chronological order. Note that a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display section holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the upper operating port 23, and The hold information corresponds to the first special information in the pachinko machine 10.

  In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 24. This is a reserved area for storing each value of the counter C3 in time series. Note that a combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second result display section holding area Rb corresponds to the holding information related to the lower operation port 24, and The hold information corresponds to the second special information in the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area has a C1 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a C2 storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a C3 storage for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It consists of an area and more. With the four storage areas from the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper working port 23 are reserved and stored.

  The C1 storage area is composed of 2 bytes, and the jackpot counter C1 value of any of 0 to 599 is stored using the lower 10 bits of 0 to 9. The upper 6 bits of 10 to 15 in the C1 storage area are unused areas.

  The C2 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and the jackpot type counter C2 value of any of 0 to 29 is stored using the lower 5 bits of 0 to 4. The upper 2 bits of 5 to 7 in the C2 storage area are unused areas.

  The C3 storage area is composed of 1 byte, and one of the reach random number counters C3 of 0 to 238 is stored using all 8 bits of 0 to 7.

  The reserved number storage area is a storage area for storing the number of use of the storage area, that is, the number of the game balls won in the upper operation port 23 and held. The reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value of 0 to 4 is stored using the lower 3 bits of 0 to 2. The upper 5 bits of 3 to 7 in the reserved number storage area are unused areas.

  Further, in the reserved ball storage area 64b, the total number of holds for storing information on the sum of the number of holds in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the number of reservations in the second result display area reservation area Rb. A storage area is provided. The total reserved number storage area is composed of 1 byte, and any value from 0 to 8 is stored using lower 4 bits of 0 to 3. Of the total reserved number storage area, the upper 4 bits of 4 to 7 are unused areas.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 6 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb, that is, a C1 storage area having a 2-byte configuration, a C2 storage area having a 1-byte configuration, and a 1-byte configuration. And a C3 storage area.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 62 in the main controller 60 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 62 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 62 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various winning switches connected to the main controller 60 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  Thereafter, in step S104, a winning process for the operating port accompanying winning in the operating ports 23, 24 is executed, and in addition, in a step S105, a winning process for winning in accordance with winning in the through gate 25 is executed. This timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The winning opening process for the operation port in step S104 and the through winning process in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 23 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning prize). If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 23, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. In the subsequent step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the upper working port 23. In step S204, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra is read, and the start reserved storage number RaN stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the first start reserved memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S205, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operation port 23, in step S206, whether or not the game ball has won the lower operation port 24 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower operation port 24. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower working port 24, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls is set in step S207. In the subsequent step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the lower operation port 24. In step S209, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the start reserved memory number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set. (Hereinafter, it is also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S205, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S206 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24, the main winning process is terminated as it is. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 70 in an external output process S501 of a normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition processing in step S205 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S209 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding result display unit hold area is set to 1 in step S302. At the same time, 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number CRN) in step S303.

  In the subsequent step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number added by 1 in step S302.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are used for the first result display unit. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation storage number RaN added by 1 in step S302 is stored.

  If the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used for the second result display section. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation storage number RbN added by 1 in the above step S302.

  In subsequent steps S305 and S306, the audio lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, are made to recognize that a winning in the upper operation port 23 or the lower operation port 24 has occurred, and a hold described later. A confirmation process for hold notice and a process for setting a hold command, which are processes for executing a notice, are executed. These processes will be described in detail later. Thereafter, the information acquisition process ends.

  Note that the hold command set by the processing in steps S305 and S306 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in the external output processing (step S501) of normal processing described later. When the voice lamp control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 23, the voice lamp control device 90 executes a process for turning on the first hold lamp unit 35. The first hold lamp unit 35 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the first start hold memory number RaN is 1, the leftmost first hold lamp unit 35 is turned on, and the first start hold memory number If RaN is 4, all the first holding lamp portions 35 are turned on. Further, when a hold command transmitted based on a winning to the lower working port 24 is received, a process for lighting the second hold lamp unit 36 is executed. The second hold lamp unit 36 is turned on sequentially from the left side. For example, if the second start hold memory number RbN is 1, the leftmost second hold lamp unit 36 is turned on, and the second start hold memory number If RbN is 4, all the second holding lamp portions 36 are turned on.

<Winning winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 25. When it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 25, the process proceeds to step S402, and it is determined whether or not the accessory reservation storage number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  If it is not determined in step S401 that a game ball has won the through gate 25, or if it is determined in step S402 that the value of the reserved item storage number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 The prize winning process is terminated without storing.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the game ball wins the through gate 25 and that the accessory reservation storage number SN <4, the process proceeds to step S403, and the accessory reservation storage number SN is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the main winning process is terminated.

  In the through winning process, a process for turning on the third holding lamp unit 37 is executed. The third hold lamp unit 37 is sequentially lit from the left side. For example, if the stored item number SN is 1, the leftmost third hold lamp unit 37 is turned on, and the stored item number SN is If it is 4, all the 3rd holding | maintenance lamp | ramp parts 37 will be lighted.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S501 to S507 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S508 and S509 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S501, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when a production command such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, or the like is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90.

  Next, in step S502, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  In subsequent step S503, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read. Thereafter, in step S504, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game times control processing, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 31, display control of the result display units AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S505, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In step S <b> 506, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 24 a provided in the lower operation port 24 is executed. In this electric combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 24a is opened, display control of the combination display 34, and the like are performed. The details of the power combination support process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. The random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S508 and S509). That is, in step S508, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S509, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S501 to S506 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process shown in FIG. 15, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S602, that is, the game times starting process of steps S603 to S605 and the game times progressing process of steps S606 to S609. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 23 and 24 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the main display unit 33 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 33 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S603 to S605. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S603, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN is “0”. The case where the common reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory number is “0” for both the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display in step S604. In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 33 and the variation display on the symbol display device 31 is performed.

  Here, the data setting process in step S604 and the change start process in step S605 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S702 to S707 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S708 to S713.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the common pending number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display hold area Ra and the second result display hold area Rb, the second result display hold area corresponding to the lower operation port 24 is stored. The hold information stored in Rb is prioritized.

  In the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S702, 1 is subtracted from the first reserved storage number RaN of the first result display unit reservation area Ra. In subsequent step S703, 1 is subtracted from the common holding number CRN. Thereafter, in step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S705, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In the subsequent step S706, if the second result display section flag is stored in the second result display section flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64, it is erased and not stored. Keep that state. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S707, a command at the time of shifting, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 63e of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the upper working port 23. A shift time command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The voice lamp control device 90 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 35 of the variable display unit 26 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received shift command.

  In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S708, the second reserved storage number RbN in the second result display section reserved area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S709, 1 is subtracted from the common holding number CRN. Thereafter, in step S710, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in the memory | storage area of 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S711 is performed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area, and the second area → the first area, the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on. In the subsequent step S712, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the second result display unit flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64, the second result display unit flag is stored and stored. If so, maintain that state.

  In the subsequent step S713, a command at the time of shifting, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 63e of the ROM 63, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 24. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The voice lamp control device 90 executes a process for changing the display on the second hold lamp unit 36 of the variable display unit 26 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received shift command.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when a normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  If it is not the high probability mode, in step S802, the determination is made with reference to the determination table for the low probability mode. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the low probability mode as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is determined in step S803 by referring to a high probability mode determination table. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. 7B. It is determined whether or not.

  After the process of step S802 or step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether the lottery result in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S805 to S812, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big win and a process for setting a stop result are executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If the second result display unit flag is not stored, in step S806, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 8A). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is a numerical range of a normal jackpot result, a numerical range of an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, a numerical range of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation jackpot Determine which of the resulting numerical ranges is included.

  On the other hand, when the second result display unit flag is stored, in step S807, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second result display unit (see FIG. 8B). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

  After the process of step S806 or step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the game result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probable jackpot result, in step S809, any stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round in which a probable jackpot result will occur. Execute the stop result setting process for probability variation jackpot to set whether to end the variable display at.

  In the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot, by referring to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63d, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot result distributed in step S806 or step S807 And the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64.

  In the subsequent step S810, the flag corresponding to the jackpot result distributed in step S806 or step S807 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, when the result is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the 15R probability variation flag is stored, when the result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored, and when the result is an implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. Stores the implicit 2R probability change flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  On the other hand, if the game result assigned in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S808, and the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, the stop result table for the normal jackpot in the stop result table storage area 63d is referred to, and the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, in step S812, after the normal big hit flag is stored in the normal big hit flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64, the stop result setting process is terminated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  If the result of the lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S804, and the flow proceeds to step S813. In step S813, for the out-of-game time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that is the out-of-game result to end the variable display. Execute the stop result setting process. In the outage stop result setting process, stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63d. And the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S814, a variable display time setting process for setting the variable display time of the current game time in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is executed. The variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S901, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 62.

  In a succeeding step S902, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 31 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any probability variation jackpot flag or normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. In step S902, an affirmative determination is made. Note that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when the occurrence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3 is specified.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 in step S903. In step S904, the variable display time information corresponding to the variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the reach non-occurrence change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 63c in step S905 is referred to, and the current change type counter CS is set. The variable display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S906. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of common hold counts CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the common pending number CRN may be used, and the variable display time may be set shorter as the number of the common pending number CRN is smaller. . When the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, the larger the first start pending storage number RaN is, the shorter the variable display time becomes, and the second start pending storage number RbN is equal to or greater than “1”. In this case, the variation display time may be set to be shorter as the number of the second start pending storage numbers RbN is larger. When the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, the larger the first start pending storage number RaN is, the shorter the variable display time becomes, and the second start pending storage number RbN is equal to or greater than “1”. In this case, the variable display time may be longer as the number of the second start reserved memory number RbN is larger, or may be set to be constant without depending on each of the reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 17), after step S814, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64 in step S815. If the second result display section flag is not stored, a first variation command is set in step S816. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information. On the other hand, if the second result display section flag is stored, a second variation command is set in step S817. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 24, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information.

  After executing the process of step S816 or step S817, the type command is set in step S818. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, normal jackpot result information, explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result information, and the like as game result information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S816 to S818 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The sound lamp control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time based on the received change command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. Further, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the received change command and type command to the display control device 100 as they are. The display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 31 so that the symbol corresponding to each game time is displayed based on the variation command and the type command.

  After that, in step S819, the display of variation of the picture is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 15), when the main display unit 33 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S606 to S609 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S606, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 64 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 18) as described above. The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S607. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S608. In the change end process, the address information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of any one of the above steps S809, S811, or S813 is specified, and the picture mode corresponding to the address information is the result display section relating to the current game round. The result display section is controlled to be displayed at.

  In the subsequent step S609, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The variation end command set in step S609 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The sound lamp control device 90 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 19, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the explicit 2R probability change flag, the implicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any one of the above flags is stored, in step S1004, a round display start process for informing the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 33. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In a succeeding step S1005, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the 15R probability variation flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is not the high-frequency winning mode, that is, if it is the low-frequency winning mode, “2” is set in the first round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in step S1006. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 22a is opened. On the other hand, if it is the high-frequency winning mode, “15” is set in the first round counter area RC1 in step S1007.

  After executing the processing of step S1006 or step S1007, an opening command is set in step S1008. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). This opening command includes information indicating whether the high-frequency winning mode or the low-frequency winning mode is set. The sound lamp control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. In addition, the opening command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the opening command, thereby displaying corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display). Display control of the symbol display device 31 is performed. After executing the process of step S1009, the gaming state transition process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, and a big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S1009. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 22a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 22c is set in the driving state on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is “1” or more. The special winning opening 22a is opened. Further, when the big prize opening 22a is being opened, the variable prize driving unit is provided on the condition that the opening limit time has passed since the opening of the big prize opening 22a or that the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 22c is stopped and the special winning opening 22a is closed. Note that the opening limit time and the opening limit number are different between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode as described above.

  In a succeeding step S1010, it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”, an ending command is set in step S1011. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The sound lamp control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. Further, the ending command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the ending command, thereby terminating the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode.

  Thereafter, in step S1012, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation flag or the explicit 2R probability variation flag is stored in the RAM 64. If any flag is stored, in step S1102, a flag erasure process for erasing information for specifying the gaming state is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted, and when they are not already stored, the states are maintained. In the subsequent step S1103, the high probability mode flag is stored, and in step S1104, the high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In subsequent step S1105, a high frequency support command (high frequency support setting information), which is information for allowing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high frequency support mode, is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90. Set as the target command. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that both the 15R probability variation flag and the explicit 2R probability variation flag are not stored, it is determined in step S1106 whether the implicit 2R probability variation flag is stored. If the implicit 2R probability change flag is stored, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored. If the high frequency support flag is not stored, steps S1108 to S1108 are performed. After executing each process of step S1110, the migration process is terminated. In this case, in step S1108, the flag erasing process is executed. In step S1109, a high probability mode flag is stored. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  In step S1110, a low-frequency support command (low-frequency support setting information) that is information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is sent to the audio lamp control device 90. Set as the command to be sent. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  On the other hand, if the high-frequency support flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1107, and after executing the processes in steps S1102 to S1105, the migration process is terminated. In this case, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is maintained at least until the next big win is won.

  If it is determined in step S1106 that the implicit 2R probability variation flag is not stored, it means that the current opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the fact that the normal jackpot flag is stored. In this case, the process of step S1111-step S1114 is performed. That is, in step S1111 the flag erasing process is executed. Thereafter, in step S1112, the high frequency support flag is stored, and in step S1113, "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, a transition is made to a normal game state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  In subsequent step S1114, a high-frequency support command (high-frequency support setting information), which is information for allowing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90. Set as the target command. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  Incidentally, the high frequency support command set in step S1105 or step S1114 and the low frequency support command set in step S1110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The The sound lamp control device 90 transmits the high frequency support command and the low frequency support command to the display control device 100 as they are. The display control apparatus 100 identifies that the support mode is the high frequency support mode based on the reception of the high frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode. Further, the display control apparatus 100 identifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode. These will be described in detail later.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 19), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S1012 is completed, a round display end process is executed in step S1013. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 33 is turned off.

  Then, in step S1014, after executing the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the gaming state transition processing ends. In the open / close execution mode end processing, if the explicit 2R probability change flag, the non-explicit 2R probability change flag, the 15R probability change flag, and the normal jackpot flag are stored, they are deleted, and if not already stored Maintain state.

<Telephone support processing>
Next, the electric role support process in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the electric power support process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 24a of the lower working port 24 is opened, and is erased when the state is returned to the closed state.

  If no supporting flag is stored, the process advances to step S1202 to determine whether or not a support winning flag is stored in a support winning flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open state is won in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 24a is in the open state, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1203, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 34. If it is the end timing of the variable display, after setting off display in step S1205, the main role support process is ended. By setting the out-of-display, the display of the variation in the pattern on the accessory display unit 34 is terminated in a state where the out-of-display is stopped.

  If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the value of the accessory reservation storage number SN is greater than “0”. When the value of the stored item reservation memory number SN is “0”, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the reserved item storage number SN is greater than “0”, it is determined in step S1207 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and in step S1208 it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. .

  If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is selected, an open lottery is performed in step S1209. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, “750” (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is started.

  In subsequent step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1209 is a support winning. If it is not a support win, the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211. If it is a support win, a support win flag is stored in step S1211 and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After “3” is set in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1212.

  In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the game number counter area is “0”. The game number counter is decremented by 1 every time one game time is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. If the game number counter area is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated. If the game number counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag is erased in step S1214. In subsequent step S1215, a low-frequency support command (low-frequency support setting information) that is information for allowing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 90. Set as the target command. Thereafter, the main role support processing is terminated.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 in step S501 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The sound lamp control device 90 transmits the low frequency support command to the display control device 100 as it is. Based on the reception of the low frequency support command, the display control device 100 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and executes processing corresponding to the support mode. This will be described in detail later.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1216. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the winning lottery is selected. Become. Simultaneously with the open lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2.

  In a succeeding step S1217, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in the step S1216 is a support winning. If the support is not won, the main role support process is terminated. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1218, and “1” is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the main role supporting process is terminated.

  If the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1219, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the accessory display unit 34 is being performed, the main character support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1220. As a result, the display of the variation of the pattern on the accessory display unit 34 is terminated in a state where the winning display is stopped. In the subsequent step S1221, the supporting flag is stored, and after the support winning flag is deleted, the main role support processing is terminated.

  If the in-supporting flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1222, and after performing the electric combination opening / closing process for opening / closing the electric combination 24a, the electric combination support process is terminated. The electric role opening / closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 24a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 24a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 24b is in a driving state. When the electric accessory 24a is opened, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”.

  When the value of the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the value of the second timer area T2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1303, and a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 24a to the closed state is performed, and “250” (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. ) Is set.

  Thereafter, in step S1304, after 1 is subtracted from the value of the second round counter area RC2, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” in step S1305. When the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is, and when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”, support is provided in step S1306. After erasing the middle flag, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the electric accessory 24a is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1301, and the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, it is determined whether or not the second timer area T2 is “0”. When the second timer area T2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the second timer area T2 is “0”, in step S1308, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 24a to the opened state is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode, and in step S1310, it is determined whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode is set, “800” (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1311, and then the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode or not in the high frequency support mode, after setting “100” (that is, 0.2 sec) in the second timer area T2 in step S1312, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. .

<About reservation notice>
Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice suggesting the contents of the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display portion and the hold area Rb for the second result display portion of the hold ball storage area 64b is This is configured to be performed with a predetermined probability at a timing before the game times related to the hold information are started. Such a hold notice is performed when the display control device 100 executes predetermined control based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 60. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the reservation notice will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to pending notice>
First, the electrical configurations of the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 91 provided in the audio lamp control device 90. The MPU 92 is a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. The RAM 94 is an element incorporating an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. From the main control device 60, the game time control commands (game time control information) such as the change command, the type command, and the change end command described above are received. Also, gaming state commands (gaming state information) such as opening commands, ending commands, high frequency support commands, and low frequency support commands are received. Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command and a hold command to be described later is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 35 to 37 provided in the variable display unit 26 and the display lamp portion 54 and the speaker portion 55 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. In addition, a display control device 100 is connected. In this case, among the various commands, various commands other than the shift command are transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101 on which an MPU 102, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 60 via the sound lamp control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, internal commands for the VDP 105). Generation).

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in each area 111 to 116 of the program ROM 103. Details of these areas 111 to 116 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 102.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs. These work data, flags and the like are stored in the respective areas 121 to 134 of the work RAM 104. Details of these areas 121 to 134 will be described together with description of processing executed by the MPU 102.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 31. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 105 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a firmware dedicated for drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 31.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 31. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 31, and the display contents of the symbol display device 31 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Regarding the process related to the hold notice executed by the main controller 60>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 will be described. As a process related to the hold notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, a hold notice confirmation process and a hold command setting process are set.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described. The confirmation process for holding notice is executed in step S305 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 12) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice. First, in step S1401, information on the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area corresponding to the operating port related to the current winning prize among the holding area Ra for the first result display section and the holding area Rb for the second result display section. , And the information on the number of the hold is stored in the register of the MPU 62. In the subsequent step S1402, it is obtained from the information for determining the big hit out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, that is, the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1. Know the information.

  In subsequent step S1403, it is determined whether or not the current probability lottery mode is the low probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 64. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S1404, with reference to the low probability mode winning / failing table shown in FIG. 7A, the information for determining the jackpot determined in step S1402 is set as the jackpot winning selection. That it is included in the information. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S1405, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S1404 or step S1405, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1402 corresponds to the jackpot winning. In the case of corresponding to the big win, in step S1407, the type determination information among the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, that is, the big hit The information acquired from the information updated by the type counter C2 is grasped.

  In subsequent step S1408, among the distribution table for the first result display unit shown in FIG. 8A and the distribution table for the second result display unit shown in FIG. To determine whether the jackpot type determination information grasped in step S1407 is included in either the information set as the normal jackpot result or the information set as the 15R probability variation jackpot result To do. In this case, in the distribution table for the first result display section, the normal jackpot result, the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the jackpot results. It may happen that none of the 15R probability variation jackpot results. On the other hand, since only the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result are set as the jackpot result in the allocation table for the second result display section, it corresponds to either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result. .

  Thereafter, in step S1409, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type information grasped in step S1407 corresponds to the 15R probability variable jackpot result. In step S1410, the jackpot type information grasped in step S1407 is determined. It is determined whether or not the normal jackpot result is supported.

  As a result, if the result corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 62 in step S1411, and then the present confirmation processing is terminated. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 62 in step S1412, and then this confirmation process is terminated. If neither the 15R probability variation jackpot result nor the normal jackpot result, that is, either the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the 2R probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 62 in step S1413. Is stored, and then the confirmation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1406 that the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1402 does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the process proceeds to step S1414. In step S1414, it is acquired from the information for judging the reach reach out of the hold information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning to the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, that is, the information updated by the reach random number counter C3. Know the information.

  In subsequent step S1415, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to, and the reach determination information grasped in step S1414 is included in the information set as the reach win. Identify whether or not Thereafter, in step S1416, it is determined whether or not the reach determination information grasped in step S1414 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the reach occurrence, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 62 in step S1417, and then this confirmation process is terminated. If it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the confirmation process is terminated as it is.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the hold command setting process will be described. The hold command setting process is executed in step S306 of the information acquisition process (FIG. 12) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). In this case, the information acquisition process is performed when a winning is made to the upper working port 23 and is also performed when a winning is made to the lower working port 24, but the information obtaining process in any case Even so, the hold command setting process is executed.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process. In the setting process, it is determined in step S1501 whether 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored in the MPU 62 register. In step S1502, it is determined whether 2R probability variation jackpot information is stored in the MPU 62 register. In step S1503, it is determined whether normal jackpot information is stored in the MPU 62 register. In step S1504, it is determined whether reach occurrence information is stored in the MPU 62 register. As a result, if the 15R probability variation jackpot information is stored (step S1501: YES), the process proceeds to step S1505, the 15R probability variation corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area provided in the RAM 64, and the 2R probability variation jackpot information is stored. If it is stored (step S1502: YES), the process proceeds to step S1506, and the 2R probability change corresponding hold command is set in the hold command setting area, and if the normal jackpot information is stored (step S1503: YES), step is performed. Proceeding to S1507, when a normal handling pending command is set in the pending command setting area and reach occurrence information is stored (step S1504: YES), the procedure proceeds to step S1508, where a reach handling pending command is set, and reach occurrence information is set. Is not remembered ( Step S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509, sets the other corresponding hold command.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S1505 to S1509, in step S1510, a process for setting the number of hold information for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set. In this case, in step S1510, first the information on the number of holds stored in the register of the MPU 62 in step S1401 in the confirmation process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 24) is read, and then the hold command already set is set. The read information on the number of reserved information is stored by an arithmetic process such as a logical sum for the information on the number of reserved information in FIG. Thereby, for the hold command set in any one of steps S1505 to S1509, information for specifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is included. .

  Thereafter, in step S1511, it is determined whether or not this time is a processing time related to winning in the upper working port 23. If it is not the processing times related to winning in the upper working port 23, the present setting process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the processing time related to winning in the upper operating port 23, in step S1512, processing for setting the information on the upper operating port for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as described above, as described above, the information on the set hold command is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and some bits of the information are sent to the upper operation port 23. Information indicating that it is related to winning can be set. In this case, in step S1512, the information on the upper working port, that is, “1” is stored in the bit for information to be awarded in the already set hold command. Note that “0” is stored in the bit as an initial value, and in this case, it means that the command relates to winning in the lower operation port 24. By executing the process in step S1512, it is determined that the hold command is related to winning in the upper operation port 23 with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes in steps S1505 to S1509. Contains information to identify. Thereafter, the setting process for the pending command is terminated.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 90 by the external output process in step S501 in the next normal process (FIG. 14). The voice lamp control device 90 specifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. In addition, the voice lamp control device 90 transmits the hold command to the display control device 100 as it is. The display control apparatus 100 executes a hold notice process based on the received hold command. This process will be described in detail later.

  At the end of the pending command setting process, the 15R probability variation jackpot information, 2R probability variation jackpot information, normal jackpot information, and reach occurrence information stored in the register of the MPU 62 are deleted.

  By the way, the setting method of the hold command is whether the display control device 100 is related to winning a prize to the upper working port 23 by the hold command, whether it corresponds to a predetermined jackpot result, It is optional as long as the presence or absence can be specified. For example, a combination of a 15R probability change corresponding hold command, a 2R probability change corresponding hold command, a normal support hold command, a reach support hold command, and other support hold commands are individually set for each of the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24. In addition, the configuration is set individually corresponding to the number of holds. In the hold command setting process, one hold command may be selected according to the confirmation result in the hold notice confirmation process (FIG. 24).

<Command Corresponding Process Executed by Display Control Device 100>
Next, command response processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Here, the command received from the main control device 60 via the voice lamp control device 90 is stored in the command storage area 121 of the work RAM 104 by a command storage process activated when the command is received. The command handling process is a process for periodically executing the MPU 102 (for example, every 2 msec) and executing various controls corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area 121. The command storage area 121 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, The processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  In the command handling process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the command storage area 121 and the command to be read this time is an opening command. If the command is an opening command, the processing from step S1602 to step S1603 is executed, and then the command corresponding processing is terminated.

  In step S1602, the opening / closing execution flag is stored in the opening / closing execution flag storage area provided in the various flags storage area 134 of the work RAM 104. The opening / closing execution flag is information for specifying in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and is stored when the opening command is received at the start of the opening / closing execution mode. At the end, it is deleted upon receipt of an ending command. In the MPU 102, when the opening / closing execution flag is stored, the display content on the symbol display device 31 corresponds to the opening / closing execution mode, and the setting and execution of the hold notice corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode as described later. And

  In the subsequent step S1603, if the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the first notice condition establishment flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 134 of the work RAM 104, the first notice condition establishment flag is erased, and then this command is supported. End the process.

  The first notice condition establishment flag is used to specify in the MPU 102 whether or not the hold notice is set to be executed in response to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23. This information is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established based on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23, and an end condition for executing the hold notice is established. This information is erased when the

  Incidentally, the various flag storage area 134 of the work RAM 104 is provided with a second notice condition establishment flag storage area for storing a second notice condition establishment flag in addition to the first notice condition establishment flag storage area. The MPU 102 specifies whether or not the second notice condition establishment flag is set to a state in which the notice of hold is to be executed with the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 24 as a trigger. Is stored in the case where a condition for executing the hold notice is established based on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24, and an end condition for the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is stored. This information is deleted when it is established.

  When the opening command is received as described above, the stored first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased, so that the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set for the hold information related to the upper operating port 23. This situation is resolved when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, even if the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 23 is set in the middle of the game times corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode as the trigger for executing the holding notice, the state is executed Canceled when the mode is executed. Therefore, it is restricted that the state in which the hold notice is to be executed triggered by the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is started immediately after the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  On the other hand, even if the opening command is received, the second notice condition satisfaction flag is not erased. Therefore, the situation that is set so that the hold notice is performed in response to the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not canceled when the opening / closing execution mode is executed. As a result, even if the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 24 is set as the trigger for execution of the hold notice in the middle of the game times corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the state remains open / closed. It is not released when the mode is executed. Therefore, it is not restricted that a state in which a holding notice is to be executed triggered by the holding information related to the lower operation port 24 is started immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If the current read target command is not an opening command, it is determined in step S1604 whether the current read target command is an ending command. If it is an ending command, after the opening / closing execution flag is deleted from the work RAM 104 in step S1605, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  If the current read target command is not an ending command, it is determined in step S1606 whether the current read target command is a high frequency support command. If it is a high frequency support command, the support flag (support specifying information) is stored in the support flag storing area (support specifying information storing means) provided in the various flag storing areas 134 of the work RAM 104 in step S1607. After that, this command response processing is terminated.

  The support flag is information for specifying in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, and is stored when the high-frequency support command is received when shifting to the high-frequency support mode. When the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, it is erased when the low frequency support command is received. In the MPU 102, when the support flag is stored, the setting and execution of the hold notice are made compatible with the high-frequency support mode as described later.

  If the current read target command is not a high frequency support command, it is determined in step S1608 whether the current read target command is a low frequency support command. If it is a low frequency support command, the support flag is deleted from the work RAM 104 in step S1609, and then this command handling process is terminated.

  If the current read target command is not a low frequency support command, it is determined in step S1610 whether the current read target command is a pending command. If the command is a pending command, the command handling process is terminated after executing the pending command handling process in step S1611. If the command is not a pending command, the variable display control process is executed in step S1612, The command response process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the pending command handling process in step S1611 and the variable display control process in step S1612 will be described in detail.

<Processing for pending command>
First, the pending command handling process in step S1611 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the hold command handling process, first, in step S1701, the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the upper operating port 23, the number of hold information acquired based on winning in the lower operating port 24, An update process at the time of winning a prize so that the total number can be specified in the MPU 102 is executed. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning. In the update process at the time of winning a prize, first in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper working port 23.

  If it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 23, the update processing of the first reserved number counter area is executed in step S1802. In the update process, the information on the first reserved number counter area provided as the first reserved number measuring means in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is used as the information on the number of held items included in the command to be read this time. Update to The first holding number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the MPU 102 the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on winning in the upper working port 23.

  When it is not transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 23, that is, when it is transmitted based on the winning to the lower working port 24, the update processing of the second reserved number counter area is performed in step S1803. Run. In the update process, the information on the second reserved number counter area provided as the second reserved number measuring means in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is used as the information on the number of reserved items included in the command to be read this time. Update to The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for specifying in the MPU 102 the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the lower working port 24.

  Incidentally, in this pachinko machine 10, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, whereas backup power is not supplied to the work RAM 104 of the display control device 100. . Then, when power interruption occurs in a situation where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 stores and holds the hold information. On the other hand, the display control apparatus 100 recognizes that there is no hold information. In this case, by adopting a configuration in which the display control apparatus 100 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area every time a hold command is received, the number of pieces of hold information actually held and stored Inconveniently, the numbers grasped in the display control device 100 may not match. On the other hand, as described above, main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of holds, and display control device 100 receives information on the number of holds included in the command every time a hold command is received. By setting it as the 1st reservation number counter area or the 2nd reservation number counter area, generation | occurrence | production of the above inconveniences is suppressed.

  After executing the process of step S1802 or step S1803, the total pending number counter area update process is executed in step S1804. In the update processing, information on the total reserved number counter area provided as the total number measuring means in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is used as information on the number of reserved numbers measured in the first reserved number counter area and the second information. The information is updated to the sum of the information on the number of reserved items measured in the reserved number counter area. The total reserved number counter area is used for the MPU 102 to specify the sum of the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on winning in the upper working port 23 and the number of holding information acquired based on winning in the lower working port 24. Counter area. After executing the process of step S1804, the update process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27), after executing the winning update process in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1702. In Step S1702, it is specified whether the hold command that is the current reading target is related to winning of the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24, and is related to winning in the upper operating port 23 In the case of determining whether or not the information on the number of reserved items measured in the total reserved number counter area is information corresponding to two or more pieces of reserved information, and is related to winning in the lower operating port 24 It is determined whether or not the information on the number of reserved items measured in the second reserved number counter area is information corresponding to two or more pieces of reserved information.

  If the condition of step S1702 is not satisfied, in step S1703, it is determined whether or not the symbol display for one game is executed on the symbol display device 31. If the change display of symbols for one game is not executed, the pending command handling process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the condition of step S1702 is satisfied, or if the condition of step S1702 is not satisfied but the change display of symbols for one game is being executed (step S1703: YES), the processing after step S1704 is performed. Execute.

  That is, in a situation where the game times related to other hold information are not executed before the game times related to the hold information related to the hold command that is read this time, the hold command that is the current read target Since the hold information related to is immediately subject to the start of game times, there is no room for executing a hold notice. Therefore, in such a situation, various settings are not performed for the holding notice.

  In step S1704, it is determined whether the hold command that is the current read target is a 15R probability change support hold command, a 2R probability change support hold command, or a normal support hold command. If the command is one of the above-mentioned jackpot-compatible pending commands, in step S1705, the information on the number of pending items included in the command that has been read this time is specified, and the command is the upper working port 23 or the lower working port. Which of 24 winning prizes is specified. Of the first erasing counter area corresponding to the upper operating port 23 and the second erasing counter area corresponding to the lower operating port 24 in the erasing counter area 123 provided in the work RAM 104, this is the current reading target. The information on the specified number of hold is specified for the erase counter area corresponding to the command.

  In a succeeding step S1706, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold flag is stored in the big hit hold flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 134 of the work RAM 104. Here, the jackpot hold flag is a hold that results in a jackpot result in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section or the hold area Rb for the second result display section of the main controller 60. When information is included, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 specifies the information.

  In addition, the first erasure counter area in the erasure counter area 123 is the start target of game times when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the first result display area hold area Ra. This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasure from the first result display area reservation area Ra. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the first erasing counter area is based on the holding information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra (that is, based on winning in the upper working port 23). Each time a new game is started, the obtained hold information is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In addition, the second erasure counter area 123 in the erasure counter area 123 is a game result start target when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb. It is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the second result display area reservation area Rb. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the second erasing counter area is based on the holding information stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb (that is, based on winning in the lower working port 24). Each time a new game is started, the obtained hold information is updated so that 1 is subtracted. And in the situation where the jackpot hold flag is stored, if the information stored in both the first erase counter area and the second erase counter area is the initial value “0”, the jackpot hold A flag erasing process is executed.

  If the big hit hold flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1706, and the hold command handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if the big hit hold flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, the big hit hold flag is stored in the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1709.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1704 that the pending command to be read this time is not any jackpot-compatible pending command, whether or not the jackpot pending flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S1708. Determine. If the big hit hold flag is stored, the hold command handling process is terminated as it is. If the big hit hold flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1709.

  When the jackpot hold flag is stored as described above, various settings for making a hold notice are not performed regardless of the hold command to be read this time. As a result, in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb of the main control device 60, the upper operating port 23 or the lower Even when new hold information is acquired based on a winning to the operation port 24, various settings for performing the hold notice are not performed.

  In step S1709, it is determined whether the first notice condition satisfaction flag or the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If any notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1709, and the pending command handling process is terminated. In other words, in a situation where it has already been set to make a hold notice for either the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 or the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 24, a new hold command is issued. Even if it is received, no new setting is made for the advance notice.

  If neither the first notice condition establishment flag nor the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold command that is the current read target is determined based on the winning to the upper operation port 23 in step S1710. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 23, it is determined in step S1711 whether or not an opening / closing execution flag is stored in the work RAM 104, and in step S1712, the work RAM 104 is read. It is determined whether a support flag is stored.

  As a result, when the opening / closing execution flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1711, and the processing for handling the pending command is terminated as it is. If the support flag is stored even if the opening / closing execution flag is not stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1712 and the pending command handling process is terminated. That is, in the case of the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode, even if a hold command based on a winning to the upper working port 23 among the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 is received, the hold notice is issued. Various settings are not performed.

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time is not based on the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode even if it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 23, the process proceeds to step S1713. If the pending command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the lower operating port 24, step S1713 is performed regardless of whether the mode is the open / close execution mode or the high frequency support mode. Proceed to

  In step S1713, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is either a 15R probability change support hold command or a normal support hold command. If it is any of these commands, the first setting process is executed in step S1714, and then the pending command handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if none of these commands, it is determined in step S1715 whether or not the hold command that is the current read target is either a 2R probability change support hold command or a reach support hold command. If it is one of these commands, the second setting process is executed in step S1716, and then the pending command handling process is terminated. If it is not any of these commands, the pending command handling process is terminated as it is.

  Hereinafter, the first setting process in step S1714 and the second setting process in step S1716 will be described. First, the first setting process of step S1714 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1901, a pending notice generation lottery process is executed. In the pending notice generation lottery process, the counter value (numerical information) for the pending notice occurrence lottery is read from the lottery counter area 124 of the work RAM 104. Here, the lottery counter area 124 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by 1 every time the command corresponding process (FIG. 26) is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. In addition, after reaching the maximum value, it is initialized to “0”. In the pending notice occurrence lottery process, the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 111 of the program ROM 103 is referred to, and the read counter value for the pending notice occurrence lottery corresponds to the pending notice occurrence winning. It is determined whether or not. Although the probability of winning the hold notice occurrence is arbitrary, in the pachinko machine 10, in the case of the big hit correspondence setting process, the lottery table is set so that the hold notice occurrence prize is won with a probability of 7/10. .

  In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S1901 is a holding notice occurrence winning. If it is not a holding advance notice winning, this setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the advance notice is to be held, the process proceeds to step S1903.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether or not the hold command that is the current read target is a normal correspondence hold command. If it is a normal correspondence hold command, in step S1904, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to a normal jackpot is executed. In the process of determining the symbol for the notice corresponding to the normal jackpot, the type of the symbol used for making the reservation notice this time is determined from among the symbols with the even number which is the main symbol corresponding to the non-specific symbol. Execute the process.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the main controller 60 relates to the display of variation of symbols in each game time, whether or not there is a big win in each game time, and the type of the jackpot result in the case of a big win In the case of not winning the jackpot, the presence / absence of reach and the variable display time at each game round are determined, and the type of symbol that is finally stopped at the end of each game round and the final stop display are displayed. The display control apparatus 100 determines the variable display patterns up to. In this case, the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 uses the symbol update counter area 125 and the symbol information acquisition area 126 provided in the work RAM 104 to determine the symbol type to be displayed in the final stop. Yes.

  More specifically, the symbol update counter area 125 is provided with a counter area for the upper symbol row, a counter area for the middle symbol row, and a counter area for the lower symbol row. A counter value corresponding to the number of symbols set in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 31 is set. That is, as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 correspond to the fact that 18 symbols are set as the total number of main symbols and sub symbols, and the counter for the upper symbol row is set. A numerical range of “0 to 17” is set in the area and the counter area for the lower symbol row. In addition, in the middle symbol row Z2, 20 counters are set as the total number of main symbols and sub-symbols. A range is set. In the counter area for each symbol row, the counter value is updated at different periods. All information updated in the counter area for each symbol row is acquired at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area 126.

  In this case, in the symbol information acquisition area 126, a normal jackpot area, a 15R probability variation jackpot area, a reach area, and a complete release area are set. Then, it is determined whether the information acquired from all the counter areas for each symbol row corresponds to the normal jackpot result, 15R probability variation jackpot result, reach, or complete losing, and the symbol information acquisition area Information on the corresponding area of 126 is updated. When determining the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed for game times that are not related to the hold notice, the area corresponding to the game result in each game time is referred to from among the above-mentioned areas of the symbol information acquisition area 126. The symbol display device 31 is controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the information stored in the referenced area is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line.

  Returning to the description of the determination process for the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, in the determination process, the normal jackpot area in the symbol information acquisition area 126 is referred to. In subsequent step S1906, the symbol type information stored in the normal jackpot area is stored in the warning symbol type information storage area 127 provided in the work RAM 104 as the warning symbol type information. Let

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1903 that the pending command to be read this time is a 15R probability variation corresponding pending command, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot is executed in step S1905. To do. In this process, the 15R probability variation jackpot area in the symbol information acquisition area 126 is referred to. In subsequent step S1906, the information on the type of symbol stored in the 15R probability variation jackpot area is stored in the type information storage area 127 of the symbol for warning as type information of the symbol for warning.

  After executing the process of step S1906, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper working port 23. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 23, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S1908. In the subsequent step S1909, information stored in the total reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is set as information of the hold notice counter area 128 provided in the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the setting process ends. As a result, it is set to a state in which the hold notice is to be executed with the hold information related to the upper working port 23 as a trigger. This state corresponds to a special notification state triggered by the hold information related to the upper working port 23 in the pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time is transmitted based on winning in the lower operating port 24, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S1910. In subsequent step S 1911, information stored in the second reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is set as information in the reserved advance counter area 128. Thereafter, the setting process ends. As a result, with the hold information relating to the lower operation port 24 as a trigger, a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set. This state corresponds to a special notification state triggered by the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 in the pachinko machine 10.

  The holding notice counter area 128 is a measuring means for the MPU 102 to specify how many game times the holding notice is to be executed thereafter when the holding notice is set to be given. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the holding notice counter area 128 is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time a new game starts, and after the update, the information in the holding notice counter area 128 is updated. When the stored information is the initial value “0”, the notice condition satisfaction flag stored at that time is deleted. In this case, as described above, when the hold notice is started using the hold information related to the upper working port 23 as an opportunity for execution, and when the hold notice is started using the hold information related to the lower working port 24 as an opportunity to execute Thus, the information set in the holding notice counter area 128 is different. The effect | action by the difference in these set information is demonstrated later.

  Next, the second setting process of step S1716 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, a pending notice occurrence lottery process is executed. The processing content of the pending notice generation lottery process is the same as the processing content described in step S1901. However, the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 111 has a lower probability of winning the holding notice occurrence in the second setting process than in the first setting process (FIG. 29). Is set to In this first setting process, the probability of winning the hold notice occurrence is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery table is set so that the hold notice occurrence winning is achieved with a probability of 1/10. .

  In a succeeding step S2002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2001 is a holding notice occurrence winning. If it is not a holding advance notice winning, this setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the holding notice is generated, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to reach is executed. In this process, the reach area in the symbol information acquisition area 126 is referred to. In step S2004, the reach symbol type information stored in the reach area is stored in the alert symbol type information storage area 127 as the alert symbol type information.

  After that, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper working port 23. If it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 23, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2006. In the subsequent step S2007, the information stored in the total reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is set as information in the reserved advance counter area 128 in the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time is transmitted based on a winning to the lower operation port 24, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2008. In the subsequent step S2009, the information stored in the second reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is set as the information in the reserved advance counter area 128. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

<Variable display control processing>
Next, the variable display control process in step S1612 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the variation display control processing, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 60 is received, the symbol display device 31 starts the variation display of the symbols for one game and is transmitted from the main control device 60. When the change end command is received, a process for displaying the change display of the symbol at the final stop is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process for appropriately correcting the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for performing the hold notice.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, in step S <b> 2101, it is determined whether or not the symbol display for one game time is executed on the symbol display device 31. If the symbol variation display for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 60 is received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2103.

  On the other hand, when the change display of symbols for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S2104 whether or not a change end command transmitted from the main control device 60 has been received. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S2105. If the change end command has been received, the change display control process is terminated after the change end process is executed in step S2106.

  Hereinafter, the variation start process in step S2103, the mid-variation process in step S2105, and the variation end process in step S2106 will be described in detail.

<Variation start processing>
First, the variation start process in step S2103 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 60.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, in step S2201, the command for fluctuation received this time is read out, and information on presence / absence of reach occurrence and information on fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, main controller 60 also transmits a type command when transmitting a variation command. Therefore, in step S2201, the type command received together with the variation command received this time is read out, and information about the 15R probability variation jackpot result, information about the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, information about the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, Information on game results, such as information on normal jackpot results or information on missed results, is specified. In step S2201, from the above identified information, information on the presence / absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence / absence of reach in the case of not winning the jackpot, and the variable display time Is stored in the register of the MPU 102.

  In a succeeding step S2202, it is determined whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the notice condition establishment flag is stored, stop result setting processing corresponding to the hold notice is executed in step S2203.

  The stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice, first, in step S2301, the notice symbol type information storage area 127 reads the notice symbol type information. In the subsequent step S2302, it is determined from the information stored in the register of the MPU 102 whether or not a 15R probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result occurs in the current game round.

  If the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result occurs, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not an effect corresponding to the pending notice can be executed in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot result this time matches the currently set type information of the notice symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot result this time is a 15R probability variation jackpot result and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, it is determined that an effect corresponding to the pending notice cannot be executed in the current game round. Further, even when the current jackpot type is the normal jackpot result and the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, it is determined that the effect corresponding to the pending notice cannot be executed in the current game round.

  Such a situation is a situation in which a hold notice is set with the hold information relating to the upper working port 23 as a trigger, a winning to the lower working port 24 occurs, the 15R probability variable jackpot result and the normal jackpot Occurs when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result different from the currently set notice symbol type information of the result is acquired. If it is determined that an effect corresponding to the hold notice cannot be executed in the current game round (step S2303: NO), the process proceeds to a stop result setting process that does not correspond to the hold notice in step S2204 in the variation start process (FIG. 32). . This restricts the display of the stop result corresponding to the type information of the notice symbol even though the type of the jackpot result does not match the kind information of the notice symbol.

  If it is determined that an effect corresponding to the pending notice can be executed in the current game round (step S2303: YES), stop line determination processing is executed in step S2304. Here, as already described in the pachinko machine 10, when the five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 31 and the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is obtained, The combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any active line. Further, in the case where the reach display is made even if neither the 15R probability variation jackpot result nor the normal jackpot result is achieved, the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on any effective line. Furthermore, even when neither the jackpot result nor the reach display is made, when the hold notice is performed, the combination of symbols for the hold notice is stopped and displayed on any active line. In this case, in the stop line determination process, a process for determining an effective line for stopping and displaying the combination of the various symbols is executed.

  In the stop line determination process, a line information update area 129 provided in the work RAM 104 is used. Specifically, a numerical value range of “0 to 4” is set in the line information update area 129 in correspondence with the number of valid lines L1 to L5, and the counter value of the numerical value range is set in a predetermined cycle. Update is performed. In the stop line determination process, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 129 at that time is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S2305, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the combination information table in the combination information table storage area 113 provided in the program ROM 103 is referred to, and the jackpot symbol combination information corresponding to the notification symbol type information grasped in step S2301 is specified. In this case, information on the same symbol combination corresponding to the symbol information on the notice symbol is specified.

  In subsequent step S2306, storage processing of address information of stop information is executed. Specifically, the program ROM 103 is provided with a stop information table storage area 112 as stop information group storage means, and the stop information table storage area 112 stores a stop information table as a stop information group. . In the stop information table, information on the combination of each stop symbol with respect to the information on each active line is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the address information. In the storage process of the stop information address in step S2306, the address information corresponding to the stop line information specified in step S2304 and the jackpot symbol combination information specified in step S2305 is read from the stop information table. The read stop information address information is stored in a stop information address storage area 130 provided in the work RAM 104.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that a big win is not generated, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not a reach display is generated in the current game round from the information stored in the register of the MPU 102. The case where the reach display is generated includes a case where an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result occurs, and a case where a reach result is won and a reach occurrence win is included.

  If reach display occurs, stop line determination processing is executed in step S2308. That is, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 129 at that time is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S2309, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the combination information table in the combination information table storage area 113 is referred to, and the reach symbol combination information corresponding to the notice symbol type information grasped in step S2301 is specified. In this case, on the condition that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped on any active line, the final stop symbol sequence, that is, the symbol type of the middle symbol sequence Z2, is the effective line on which the reach line is formed. Reach symbol combination information is identified with reference to the stop line information identified in step S2308 so that symbols of the same type as symbols constituting the reach symbol combination are stopped at different stop display positions. . For example, when the type information of the notice symbol is “7” and the stop line is L1, the reach symbol combination is “7”, “6”, “7” from the top. Identify the combination information. In this case, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the active line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2. In the combination information table of the combination information table storage area 113, the information on the combination of reach symbols is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on each active line and the information on the type of the notice symbol.

  In a succeeding step S2310, stop information address information storage processing is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information specified in step S2308 and the reach symbol combination information specified in step S2309 is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 112 and read. The stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 130.

  If it is determined in step S2307 that reach display does not occur, stop line determination processing is executed in step S2311. That is, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 129 at that time is acquired.

  In the subsequent step S2312, a symbol combination determination process is executed. In this process, the combination information table in the combination information table storage area 113 is referred to, and the information of the combination of completely out-of-line symbols corresponding to the type information for the notice symbol ascertained in step S2301 is specified. In this case, on the condition that the combination of jackpot symbol and reach symbol is not stopped on all active lines, the symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbol are stopped in the display screen G in all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In order to stop display at the display position, the information on the combination of completely deviated symbols is specified with reference to the information on the stop line specified in step S2311. For example, when the type information of the notice symbol is “7” and the stop line is L1, the combination of the completely deviated symbols is “7” from the top, and the sub symbols between “6” and “7”. , Information on the combination of completely out-of-line symbols is specified so as to be a sub symbol between “6” and “7”. In this case, the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the effective line L3 in the middle symbol row Z2, and the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on the effective line L3 in the lower symbol row Z3. In the combination information table of the combination information table storage area 113, the information on the completely out of symbol combination is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information on each active line and the information on the type of the notice symbol.

  In the subsequent step S2313, storage processing of address information of stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the information on the stop line specified in step S2311 and the information on the combination of completely out-of-line symbols specified in step S2312 is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 112 and read. The stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 130.

  After executing the process of step S2306, step S2310, or step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314. In step S2314, the notice execution flag is stored in the notice execution flag storage area in the various flags storage area 134 of the work RAM 104. The advance notice flag is information for the MPU 102 to specify that the symbol display device 31 is executing the hold advance notice. Thereafter, the stop result setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 32), if it is determined in step S2202 that the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, a stop result setting process not corresponding to the hold notice is executed in step S2204. . In this case, information stored in the line information update area 129 at that time is read as stop line information, and a normal jackpot area in the symbol information acquisition area 126, 15R probability variation jackpot, as symbol combination information. The information stored at that time in the area corresponding to the game result of the current game round is read out of the area for use, the area for reach, and the area for complete removal. If the game result is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result or an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, information stored in the reach area at that time is read. After that, address information corresponding to the specified stop line information and symbol combination information is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 112, and the read address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 130. Store.

  After executing the process of step S2203 or step S2204, the process for setting the variable display pattern is executed in step S2205. In the variable display pattern setting process, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 114 of the program ROM 103 is referred to, and the variable display time information stored in the register of the MPU 102 in step S2201 and the step S2203. Alternatively, the information of the variable display pattern corresponding to both the information stored in the storage area 130 of the stop information address in step S2204 is specified.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the variable display pattern table sets the variable display pattern information in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of the variable display time information and the stop information. In addition, address information is set corresponding to the information of each variable display pattern. In the variable display pattern setting process in step S2205, the address information corresponding to the combination of the variable display time information and the stop information already specified this time is specified in the variable display pattern table, and the specified address information is changed to the work information. The data is stored in the pattern information address storage area 131 provided in the RAM 104.

  By storing the variable display pattern address information in the pattern information address storage area 131, the MPU 102 generates an internal command for the VDP 105 in an internal command output process (not shown) different from the process for starting the fluctuation. Then, the symbol display device 31 is driven so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the variation display pattern set this time is performed. In this case, the output process of the internal command is started repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and in the output process of the internal command, the internal command corresponding to the information of the set variation display pattern is displayed as a symbol. Generated according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and outputs the generated internal command to the VDP 105. In the VDP 105, image data is read from the character ROM 106 in accordance with the internal command, and the read image data is written to the video RAM 107. Thereby, the symbol display corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time is performed on the symbol display device 31.

  Note that the information on the variation display pattern stored in the variation display pattern table includes not only the contents of the variation display of the symbol, but also the background image information displayed together with the variation display of the symbol and the reach effect. Information on the image of reach production is also included. Therefore, when an internal command corresponding to the set variation display pattern is output to the VDP 105, a background image is displayed together with a symbol variation display, and further, when various effects such as reach effects are performed, An effect image is displayed.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and it is distinguished between symbol display pattern information (first display pattern information) and other display pattern information (second display pattern information). Only the information on the variable display mode is included, and the information on the other display pattern may include information on the background image and information on the image of reach when the reach effect is performed. In this case, at the time of correcting the variable display pattern, which will be described later, both the symbol display pattern information and the other display pattern information may be corrected, or only the symbol display pattern information may be corrected. Furthermore, the symbol display pattern information is individually provided for each of the upper symbol row Z1 as the first symbol row, the middle symbol row Z2 as the second symbol row, and the lower symbol row Z3 as the third symbol row. It is good also as the composition set up. In this case, at the time of correcting the later-described variable display pattern, only the symbol display pattern information of the symbol sequence to be corrected may be corrected.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 32), after the variation display pattern setting process is executed in step S2205, an update process at the start of variation is performed in step S2206. The update process at the start of change will be described after the change process and the change end process have been described in order to facilitate understanding.

<Variation processing>
Next, the mid-variation process in step S2105 in the variation display control process (FIG. 31) will be described. The variable processing is not a game time in which the hold notice is being executed, and a new winning is given to the operation ports 23 and 24 in the middle of the game time that is not the game time related to the hold information that causes the hold notice to be executed. This is a process for executing the hold notice at the current game number when the hold notice execution condition is established for the hold information acquired based on the winning.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game game in which a big hit or reach has occurred. In the case of a big hit or reach game time, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit or reach game time, the notice execution flag is not stored in the work RAM 104 in spite of the notice condition establishment flag being stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2402. It is determined whether or not. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, as described above, the notice execution flag is stored by executing the change start process (FIG. 32) in the situation where the notice condition establishment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the notice execution flag is not stored even though the notice condition establishment flag is stored is the situation in which the change display of symbols in one game round is started after the change start process is executed. This means that a new winning for the operating ports 23 and 24 is generated later, and a condition for executing the holding notice for the holding information acquired based on the winning is established.

  If the notice condition establishment flag is stored and the notice execution flag is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated as it is, the notice condition establishment flag is stored, and the notice execution flag is stored. If not, in step S 2403, the notice symbol type information storage area 127 reads the notice symbol type information. In the following step S2404, it is determined whether or not all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 31, as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), first, the upper symbol row Z 1, the middle symbol row Z 2, and High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is performed so that identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol sequences in the lower symbol column Z3 is impossible or difficult in appearance. Thereafter, when the period of T1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, first, with respect to the upper symbol row Z1, each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 is easily identified in appearance. The display is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display), and the fluctuation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped when the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the period of T2 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, for the lower symbol row Z3, identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 is easy in appearance. Thus, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the period of T3 has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation in this way, in the middle symbol row Z2, it is easy to identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2. Thus, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, when the period T4 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

  In the above configuration, except for the case where predetermined reach display is performed, the period of T1, T2, T3, and T4 is more detailed according to each variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 114. Are determined in a one-to-one correspondence with each variation display pattern. Then, the reach effect or the like is performed after the period T3 has elapsed and until the period T4 has elapsed.

  Note that it is not essential that the timing at which the symbol variation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the symbol variation display speed in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched at the same time. Good. Similarly, it is not essential that the timing at which the change display of the symbol in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the change display speed of the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is switched are not the same. It may be. Further, T1, T2, and T3 correspond one-to-one with the number of holding information stored at the start of game times, more specifically, according to the number of holding information stored at the start of game times. It is good also as a structure defined as follows. Further, when the number of pieces of holding information stored at the start of the game round is the maximum number of holdings, any of T1, T2, and T3 may be set to “0”.

  The MPU 102 measures the time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 31 by using an elapsed time counter area 132 as an elapsed time measuring means provided in the work RAM 104. Specifically, when the variable display is started, the addition process of the elapsed time counter area 132 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the elapsed time table of the elapsed time table storage area 115 provided in the program ROM 103, information on each counter value corresponding to T1, T2, and T3 is information on a variable display pattern that can be set at the start of the game times. And stored in a one-to-one correspondence with each other. In step S2404, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current elapsed time counter area 132 is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the elapsed time table storage area 115. It is determined whether or not the columns Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group is referred to in step S2405. The first stage correction table is stored in a correction table storage area 116 as correction information group storage means provided in the program ROM 103. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the first stage correction table is an arbitrary combination of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the notice symbol except when the jackpot result is reached and the reach display occurs. The first correction variation display pattern information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each combination, and the address information is set in correspondence with each first correction variation display pattern information. Yes. In this case, all of the information on the first correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the first correction variation display pattern is set so as not to change the variation display time in the initially set variation display pattern.

  In subsequent step S2406, first correction address information (first correction information) corresponding to the combination of the type information of the notice symbol specified in step S2403 and the information stored in the storage area 131 of the pattern information address. ) Is specified from the first stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 133 provided in the work RAM 104.

  After the first correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 133, the MPU 102 determines that the period T1 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 132. Then, an internal command is generated and output to the VDP 105 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the information of the first correction variation display pattern set this time is performed. As a result, when the variable display of symbols is stopped, all the symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbol are displayed on condition that the combination of jackpot symbols and reach symbols are not stopped on all active lines. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G.

  The information of the first correction variation display pattern stored in the first stage correction table includes not only the content of the symbol variation display but also the information of the background image displayed together with the symbol variation display, Information on the image of the reach effect when the reach effect is performed is also included. Therefore, by outputting an internal command corresponding to the set variation sign pattern for the first correction to the VDP 105, the background image is displayed together with the symbol variation display, and various effects such as reach effects are performed. If it is displayed, the effect image is displayed. The same applies to information on the second correction variable display pattern and information on the third correction variable display pattern, which will be described later.

  Thereafter, after the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2407, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2404 that all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S2408 whether the lower symbol sequence Z3 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the current elapsed time counter area 132 is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the elapsed time table storage area 115.

  If it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, in step S2409, the stop symbol type information of the upper symbol row Z1 is obtained based on the information stored in the storage area 130 of the stop information address. To grasp. In this case, there is a case where there are one main symbol and two cases as the type information of the stop symbol, but in the case of one, it is specified as a symbol to be determined. Both of them are specified as symbols to be determined.

  In a succeeding step S2410, it is determined whether or not a correction condition is established for the determination target symbol specified in the step S2409. The correction condition is set so that if the notice symbol type information is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied regardless of the symbol to be determined. In addition, when the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the determination target symbol is a non-specific symbol. Is set to

  By setting the correction conditions as described above, a jackpot result is generated or a reach display is generated due to a non-specific symbol in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the hold notice from being executed by the specific symbol in the game times related to the hold notice before the game times. If a hold notice is executed for a specific symbol, the player is expected to expect a probabilistic jackpot result that will eventually cause the same specific symbol combination to stop on the active line. However, if a combination of reach symbols or jackpot symbols is finally displayed by a non-specific symbol, there is a concern that the above feeling of expectation will be lost and the willingness to continue playing will be reduced. This can be prevented by the configuration in FIG. On the other hand, if a reach symbol combination or a jackpot symbol combination is finally displayed by a specific symbol, even if a hold notification is executed by a non-specific symbol in the game times related to the previous hold notification, For a player, it can be considered that the player has finally been promoted from a non-specific symbol to a specific symbol, and this is considered not to cause a decrease in the willingness to continue the game as described above.

  Note that if the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the determination target symbol is a specific symbol. In addition, if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the determination target symbol is a non-specific symbol. May be set. In this case, if a jackpot result is generated by a non-specific symbol or a reach display is generated in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the condition to execute the hold notification, the non-specific symbol is notified. If a jackpot result is generated by a specific symbol or a reach display is generated in the game times related to the holding information that causes the condition to execute the holding notification, the holding notification is performed by the specific symbol It will be.

  If it is determined in step S2410 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the mid-variation process is terminated, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2411.

  In step S2411, the second stage correction table as the second stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 116 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 36 (b), the second stage correction table includes information on the original variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when a jackpot result and reach display occur. Information on the second correction variation display pattern is set in correspondence with an arbitrary combination on a one-to-one basis, and address information is set in correspondence with information on each second correction variation display pattern. ing. In this case, all of the information on the second correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variable display pattern for each second correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

  In the subsequent step S2412, the second correction purpose corresponding to the combination of the symbol type information of the determination target determined to satisfy the correction condition in step S2410 and the information stored in the pattern information address storage area 131. Address information (second correction information) is specified from the second-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 133.

  If two symbols are subject to determination and the correction condition is satisfied for any of the symbols, the determination target for which the correction condition is satisfied for the symbol corresponding to the specific symbol It is comprised so that it may become a design of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the symbol corresponding to the non-specific symbol may be configured to be the symbol to be determined that the correction condition is satisfied. Moreover, you may comprise so that the symbol of the side with a small attached | subject number may be made into the symbol of the determination object determined that the said correction conditions are satisfied.

  When the second correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 133, the MPU 102 determines that the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the change based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 132. An internal command is generated and output to the VDP 105 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the information of the second correction variation display pattern set this time is performed. As a result, when the symbol variation display is stopped, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied on the condition that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, after the advance notice flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2413, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2408 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S2414 whether the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current value stored in the elapsed time counter area 132 is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the elapsed time table storage area 115.

  When it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is not changing at high speed, the changing processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, in step S2415, based on the information stored in the stop information address storage area 130, the stop symbol type information of the upper symbol row Z1 and And grasping the type information of the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as the stop symbol type information of the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is used as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In the case of two, both are specified as symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. In addition, there are cases where there is one main symbol and two cases as stop symbol type information in the lower symbol row Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. In the case of two, both are specified as the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3.

  In a succeeding step S2416, it is determined whether or not a correction condition is established for the determination target symbol specified in the step S2415. The correction condition is determined that the correction condition is satisfied when there is no common symbol of the same type in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol row Z3. It is set not to be. Even if there is a common symbol of the same type, if the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, any of the common symbols of the same type If it is set so that the correction condition is satisfied even if it exists, and the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, It is set so that the correction condition is determined to be satisfied only when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

  By determining that the correction condition is satisfied when there is a common symbol of the same type, it is possible to perform the hold notice in the already described mode. Further, by determining whether or not the correction condition is satisfied in relation to the type information of the notice symbol as described above, the same effect as that described in step S2410 can be achieved. Note that the correction condition relating to the relationship with the type information of the notice symbol may be the other pattern described in step S2410.

  If it is determined in step S2416 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the processing for mid-variation is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2417.

  In step S2417, the third-stage correction table as the third-stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 116 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 36 (c), the third-stage correction table includes information on the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the determination target symbol except when a jackpot result and reach display occur. The information of the third correction variation display pattern is set in a one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination, and the address information is set in correspondence with the information of the third correction variation display pattern. ing. In this case, all of the information on the third correction variation display pattern is set as information on the variation display pattern after the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variation display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variation display time in the variation display pattern that was initially set.

  In the subsequent step S2418, the third correction is performed corresponding to the combination of the symbol type information of the determination target determined to satisfy the correction condition in step S2416 and the information stored in the pattern information address storage area 131. Address information (third correction information) is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 133.

  After the third correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 133, the MPU 102 determines that the period T3 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 132. An internal command is generated and output to the VDP 105 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to the information of the third correction variation display pattern set this time is performed. As a result, when the symbol variation display is stopped, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied on the condition that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, after the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2419, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  In addition, it is not essential for the mid-variation processing to have a configuration in which the change display pattern for holding notice is not corrected in both the jackpot game number and the reach game number. Although the change display pattern for the hold notice is not corrected in the game, the change display pattern for the hold notice may be corrected in the game times where the reach has occurred. In addition, by executing the processing of step S2410 and step S2416, the type of the stop symbol and the type of the notification symbol of the symbol sequence for which the high-speed fluctuation display has already been completed are compared, and the notification symbol becomes a normal jackpot result. When the corresponding non-specific symbol and the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability change jackpot result, the change display pattern is not corrected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if it is a non-specific symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result, the variable display pattern may be corrected.

<Situation when the change display pattern is corrected and the hold notice is executed>
Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 37, a state in which the change display pattern is corrected and the hold notice is executed will be described.

  FIG. 37A shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed. In this case, the execution condition of the holding notice is established from the timing t1 which is the timing of the start of the change to the timing t2 when the period T1 elapses. In this situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the original variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern after the timing t2.

  FIG. 37 (B) shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when high-speed fluctuation is not performed in the upper symbol row Z1, but high-speed fluctuation is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. Indicates. In this case, the execution condition of the hold notice is established from the timing t2 when the period T1 elapses to the timing t3 when the period T2 elapses. In such a situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the original variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t3, and the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern after the timing t3.

  FIG. 37 (C) shows a case where the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are not changed at high speed but the middle symbol row Z2 is changed at high speed. Indicates. In this case, the execution condition of the hold notice is established from the timing t3 when the period T2 elapses to the timing t4 when the period T3 elapses. In this situation, the symbol variation display is performed based on the original variation display pattern from the timing t1 to the timing t4, and the symbol variation display is performed based on the correction variation display pattern after the timing t4.

  37A to 37C illustrate the case where the initial variation display patterns are all the same, the variation start (timing of t1) in any of FIGS. 37A to 37C. ) To the end of change (timing at t5), T4 is the same.

<Variation end processing>
Next, the process for ending change in step S2106 in the change display control process (FIG. 31) will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, in step S2501, a final stop display command output process is executed. As a result, the final stop display command is output to the VDP 105, and the stop result symbol in the current game round is finally stopped and displayed.

  In a succeeding step S2502, it is determined whether or not a notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the advance notice flag is not stored, the process for ending the change is terminated as it is. If the advance notice flag is stored, the notice execution flag is deleted in step S2503, and then the change end process is completed. The process ends.

<Specific mode of reservation notice>
Next, a specific aspect of the hold notice in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific mode of the hold notice. Note that in FIG. 39, a state in which a hold notice is to be executed triggered by the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is set, and a specific symbol “7” is set in the game times related to the hold information triggered by the hold information. ”Is a case where a jackpot result is generated, and the number of game times related to the reservation notice until the last game time is two.

  FIG. 39 (a) shows a case in which a variable display pattern for holding notice is set from the beginning of game times in all game times related to the holding notice. In this case, the symbol stop result in the first game shown in FIG. 39 (a-1) is that the combination of jackpot symbol and reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines. The symbol “7” as a symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, the symbol stop result in the next game round shown in FIG. 39 (a-2) does not stop the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol on all the active lines, but the symbol for the preliminary announcement of this pending notice. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. However, the position where the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed is different between the first game time and the next game time. Thereby, the stop mode of the symbol in the hold notice is diversified.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the symbol for the hold notice is always stopped and displayed at the same stop display position in the case of the hold notice except for the final game times related to the hold notice. Further, in this case, as shown in FIG. 39 (a-1), for the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol for holding notice may be stopped and displayed on the same active line. . The same applies to other patterns.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 39 (a-3), the combination of jackpot symbols based on the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on one active line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 39A, the symbol for notice is unified to the symbol “7” in all game times related to the pending notice.

  FIG. 39 (b) shows a case where a variable display pattern for holding notice is set from the middle of the game times in the first game times of each game time related to the holding notice. In this case, the symbol stop result in the first game shown in FIG. 39 (b-1) shows that the combination of jackpot symbol and reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines, but the initial variation display pattern The symbol “3” corresponding to the stop symbol of the symbol row Z1 or the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, the symbol stop result in the next game round shown in FIG. 39 (b-2) shows that the jackpot symbol combination and the reach symbol combination are not stopped on all the active lines, but the notice symbol for this pending notice is not stopped. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, in the final game round shown in FIG. 39 (b-3), the combination of jackpot symbols with the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on one active line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 39 (b), the notice symbol is unified with the specific symbol in all game times related to the pending notice.

  Similarly to FIG. 39B, FIG. 39C also shows a case where the variable display pattern for the hold notice is set from the middle of the game times in the first game time of each game time related to the hold notice. In this case, the symbol stop result in the first game shown in FIG. 39 (c-1) is that the combination of jackpot symbol and reach symbol combination is not stopped on all active lines, but the initial variation display pattern The symbol “6” corresponding to the stop symbol of the symbol row Z1 or the stop symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  In addition, the symbol stop result in the next game round shown in FIG. 39 (c-2) shows that the jackpot symbol combination and the reach symbol combination are not stopped on all the active lines, but the notice symbol for this pending notice is not stopped. The symbol “7” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  After that, in the final game round shown in FIG. 39 (c-3), the combination of jackpot symbols based on the symbol “7” is stopped and displayed on one active line. In other words, in the pattern shown in FIG. 39 (c), the player can expect that the stop result is promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol from the first game cycle to the next game cycle related to the hold notice.

<Update process at the start of change>
Next, the update process at the start of change in step S2206 in the change start process (FIG. 32) will be described.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, first, in step S2601, the total reserved number is subtracted by 1 so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is subtracted. Update counter area information. In the subsequent step S2602, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. The first variation command is a command that is transmitted from the main control device 60 when the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is a game round start target.

  If it is the first change command (step S2602: YES), in step S2603, 1 is subtracted from the hold number stored in the first hold number counter area in the various hold number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104. As described above, the information of the first reserved number counter area is updated. In a succeeding step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the first erasure counter area in the erasure counter area 123 of the work RAM 104 is 1 or more.

  If the value stored in the first erasing counter area is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S2613 without executing the processes in steps S2605 to S2607. If the value stored in the first erasure counter area is 1 or more, the first erasure is performed so that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is decremented by 1 in step S2605. The counter area information is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not both the value of the first erase counter area and the value of the second erase counter area are “0”. If both are “0”, the jackpot hold flag is deleted in step S2607, and then the process proceeds to step S2613. If neither is “0”, the process of step S2607 is performed. It proceeds to step S2613 without executing.

  On the other hand, if the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (step S2602: NO), that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, in step S2608, the work RAM 104 The information of the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number of reserved values stored in the second reserved number counter area 122 in the various reserved number counter areas 122 is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S2609, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the second erasure counter area in the erasure counter area 123 of the work RAM 104 is 1 or more.

  If the value stored in the second erasing counter area is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S2613 without executing the processes in steps S2610 to S2612. If the value stored in the second erasure counter area is 1 or more, the second erasure is performed so that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is decremented by 1 in step S2610. The counter area information is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S2611, it is determined whether or not both the value of the first erase counter area and the value of the second erase counter area are “0”. If both are “0”, the jackpot hold flag is erased in step S2612, and then the process proceeds to step S2613. If neither is “0”, the process of step S2612 is performed. It proceeds to step S2613 without executing.

  As already described, the jackpot holding flag is a jackpot result in the holding information stored in the first result display holding area Ra or the second result display holding area Rb of the main controller 60. This flag is stored when the hold information corresponding to is included. In addition, when the first erasure counter area stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game times in the first result display portion hold area Ra. Information for specifying whether or not is stored. Further, when the second erasure counter area stores the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the order in which the hold information is the start target of the game times in the second result display section hold area Rb Information for specifying whether or not is stored. Therefore, when both the value of the first erasure counter area and the value of the second erasure counter area are “0” as the initial value, the first result display area reservation area Ra of the main controller 60 or This means that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is not included in the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the second result display section. In this case, the jackpot hold flag is deleted.

  In the update process at the start of fluctuation, in step S2613, it is determined whether either the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104. As already described, in the situation where either one of the notice condition establishment flags is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S1709 of the hold command handling process (FIG. 27), and no new hold notice is set. Therefore, a situation in which both the first notice condition satisfaction flag and the second notice condition satisfaction flag are stored at the same time does not occur.

  If both the first notice condition establishment flag and the second notice condition establishment flag are not stored, the updating process is terminated as it is. If either the first notice condition establishment flag or the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, the value stored in the holding notice counter area 128 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by 1 in step S2614. Thus, the information in the counter area for reservation notice 128 is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S 2615, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the pending notice counter area 128 is “0”. If it is not “0”, this update process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the present condition stored flag is erased in step S2616 and The update process ends. By the way, in the game times when the notice condition establishment flag is erased, an effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed. In addition, the special notification state is canceled in the pachinko machine 10 by ending the game times when the notice condition establishment flag is erased.

<When the status set to execute the hold notice is canceled>
As already described, the first notice condition establishment flag is a flag that is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23, and the second notice condition is established. The flag is a flag that is stored when a condition for executing the hold notice is established with the hold information relating to the lower operation port 24 as a trigger. Further, when the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored for the hold notice counter area 128, it is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb at that time. When the total number of held information is set and the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the information on the number of held information stored in the second result display section holding area Rb at that time is set. Is done. The information stored in the pending notice counter area 128 is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time a game round is newly started.

  In other words, when the information in the holding notice counter area 128 is “0” as an initial value in the situation where the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the notice of holding is given as a result of the holding information related to the upper operating port 23. When the condition that should be executed is satisfied, the game times corresponding to the total number of the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display portion and the hold area Rb for the second result display portion are to be started. In this case, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted. On the other hand, when the information in the holding notice counter area 128 becomes “0” as an initial value in the situation in which the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, the notice of holding is given by the holding information related to the lower operation port 24 as an opportunity. Means that the number of game times corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb becomes the start target when the condition to execute is satisfied. The condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

  The effect by the said process structure is demonstrated below. FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing a state in which a hold notice is executed for hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and a hold notice is performed using the hold information as a trigger for execution. 41 (a) shows the execution status of the game times, FIG. 41 (b) shows the winning status to the upper working port 23, FIG. 41 (c) shows the winning status to the lower working port 24, FIG. (D) shows the number of holding information related to the upper operating port 23, FIG. 41 (e) shows the number of holding information related to the lower operating port 24, and FIG. 41 (f) shows the storage of the first notice condition establishment flag. FIG. 41 (g) shows the counter value in the pending notice counter area 128. FIG.

  First, a case will be described in which a hold notice is started using the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 23 as an opportunity to execute, and an effect corresponding to the hold notice including the game times related to the hold information is executed.

  In a situation where a predetermined game round is being executed, when the winning to the upper working port 23 occurs at the timing t1, the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is newly acquired. In this case, since one piece of hold information related to the upper working port 23 has already been stored, the number of pieces of the hold information is two. In addition, since one piece of holding information related to the lower working port 24 has already been stored, the total number of the holding information related to the upper working port 23 and the holding information related to the lower working port 24 is three. When the condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information acquired at the timing of t1, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, and the hold notice counter area 128 is the total number 3 Pieces of information are set.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the game times that have been executed up to that point are completed, and a new game time is started at the timing of t3. In this case, as already described in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is given priority over the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as an object for starting the game round, and as described above, t 3 The hold information related to the lower working port 24 is stored at the timing. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the game turn is started with the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 becomes zero. Further, 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter area for holding advance notice 128 to “2”. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the game times started at the timing of t3 are ended. Since the first notice condition establishment flag is stored at the start of the game times, a stop result corresponding to the hold notice is displayed at the end of the game times.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t5. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the game times are started with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is 1. Subtracted to get one. In addition, the value of the holding notice counter area 128 is decremented by 1 to “1”. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the game times started at the timing of t5 are ended. Since the first notice condition establishment flag is stored at the start of the game times, a stop result corresponding to the hold notice is displayed at the end of the game times.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t7. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the game time is started with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is reduced by one. It becomes 0 pieces. In addition, the value of the holding notice counter area 128 is decremented by 1 to “0”, and accordingly, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

  Here, no hold information is acquired by the timing t7 after the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is acquired at the timing t1, and the number of stored hold information is 0 at the timing t7. It has become. Therefore, the hold information that is the target of starting the game times at the timing of t7 is the hold information that triggered the execution of the current hold notice. In addition, since the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored at the start of the current game round, a stop result corresponding to the hold notice is displayed at the timing t8, and the game round started at the timing t7 is displayed. Is terminated.

  Further, the value of the counter notice area for holding notice 128 is subtracted when the game is started at the timing of t7, and as a result, becomes “0”. Therefore, in the current hold notice, the hold notice is executed up to the game times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice, and the hold information that triggered the hold notice is executed. In the game times, an effect corresponding to the previous hold notice is executed.

  In addition, the situation as described above indicates that the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is newly added after the condition for executing the hold notice is established and before the game times related to the hold information that has been triggered are started. Even if it is acquired, the same occurs.

  Next, the hold notice is started by using the hold information related to the winning to the upper operating port 23 as an opportunity for execution, and the effect corresponding to the hold notice is ended in the game times before the game times related to the hold information, A case will be described in which the game times related to the hold information are not included in the game times of the production target corresponding to the hold notice.

  In a situation where a predetermined game round is being executed, when the winning to the upper operating port 23 occurs at the timing of t9, the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is newly acquired. In this case, since one piece of hold information related to the upper working port 23 has already been stored, the number of pieces of the hold information is two. In addition, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the total number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is two. When the condition for executing the hold notice is established for the hold information acquired at the timing of t9, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, and the hold notice counter area 128 is the above total number of 2 Pieces of information are set.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the game times that have been executed up to that point are completed, and at the timing of t11, new game times are started. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the game times are started with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is 1. Subtracted to get one. In addition, the value of the holding notice counter area 128 is decremented by 1 to “1”.

  Thereafter, when a prize is generated in the lower working port 24 at the timing of t12, the holding information related to the lower working port 24 is newly acquired, and the number of the holding information related to the lower working port 24 becomes one. Thereafter, at the timing of t13, the game times started at the timing of t11 are ended. Since the first notice condition establishment flag is stored at the start of the game times, a stop result corresponding to the hold notice is displayed at the end of the game times.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t14. In this case, although the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is stored, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 that is prioritized as a game start target is stored. Game times are started with information as a starting target. As a result, the number of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 becomes zero. In addition, the value of the holding notice counter area 128 is decremented by 1 to “0”, and accordingly, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted.

  Thereafter, when a winning is made to the lower working port 24 at the timing of t15, the holding information related to the lower working port 24 is newly acquired, and the number of the holding information related to the lower working port 24 becomes one. At this timing, since the notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the hold information can be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, but here, it is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. Thereafter, at the timing of t16, the game times started at the timing of t14 are ended. Since the first notice condition establishment flag is stored at the start of the game times, a stop result corresponding to the hold notice is displayed at the end of the game times.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t17. In this case, although the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is stored, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 that is prioritized as a game start target is stored. Game times are started with information as a starting target. As a result, the number of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 becomes zero. Thereafter, at the timing of t18, the game times started at the timing of t17 are ended. In such game times, since the notice condition establishment flag is not stored at the start of the game, the stop result corresponding to the hold notice is not displayed at the end of the game.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t19. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the game times are started with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as a start target, and thus the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is 1 Subtracted to 0.

  Here, the holding information related to the upper working port 23 is not acquired by the timing of t19 after the holding information related to the upper working port 23 is acquired at the timing of t9. The number is 0 at the timing of t19. Therefore, the hold information that is the target for starting the game times at the timing of t19 is the hold information that triggered the execution of the current hold notice. However, since the first notice condition establishment flag has already been deleted at the timing of t14, and the first notice condition establishment flag is not stored at the start of the current game, the stop corresponding to the hold notice is made at the timing of t20. Unless a result is selected by chance, a stop result that does not correspond to the hold notice is displayed, and the game times started at the timing of t19 are ended.

  In other words, in the current hold notice, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is canceled before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice are started. In the game times related to the hold information, the effect corresponding to the previous hold notice is not executed. Furthermore, the state in which the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied is canceled when the game times two times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice are started. Therefore, the game times in which an effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed and the game times related to the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice are not continuous.

  Next, a case will be described in which a hold notice is started with the hold information relating to winning in the lower working port 24 as an opportunity to execute.

  Since the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is preferentially selected as the start target of the game times as already described, when the hold notice is started using the hold information related to winning a prize to the lower working port 24 as an execution opportunity In other words, the number of game times to be executed before the hold information becomes a game turn start target is determined according to the number of hold information related to the lower operation port 24 stored at that time. Accordingly, when the hold information related to the lower operation opening 24 is set as an opportunity for execution of the hold advance notice, the state in which the hold advance notice is to be executed is stored in the lower operation opening 24 stored at the time of setting the state. By adopting a configuration in which the number of game times corresponding to the number of the hold information is maintained, an effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed including the game times related to the hold information triggered by the hold notice.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb corresponding to the lower operating port 24 is more than the holding information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra corresponding to the upper operating port 23. Precise / failure lottery is performed. As a result, an expectation for a launch operation such as performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the upper working port 23 or performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the lower working port 24 depending on the game situation or the like. Diversification is achieved and the level of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, the information is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and is not the target of the determination, or is stored in the second result display area Rb and is the target of the determination. There is a case in which a hold notice corresponding to no hold information is executed in the game times before the game times related to the hold information. As a result, for the player, the game for generating a prize to the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 and the determination result of the hold information obtained based on the win are confirmed in the game times related to the hold information. In addition to the game, if a plurality of hold information is stored on hold, the result of the decision on the success / failure for the later hold information in accordance with the content of the hold notice A game of prediction is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, in the case of starting the hold notice with the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 as an opportunity for execution, the number of reserved information related to the upper operating port 23 at the time when the hold information is acquired and the lower operating port 24 The effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed only for the number of game times corresponding to the sum of the number of hold information of the hold information. For example, assuming a configuration in which a state in which the hold notice is to be executed is maintained until the hold information becomes a start target of the game when the hold notice is started using the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as an opportunity, When winnings to the lower operation port 24 are continued at a timing before the hold information becomes a game start target, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is preferentially selected as a game start start target. Therefore, the game times in which the effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed are continued. If the presentation related to the hold notice continues more than necessary, the player will become more accustomed to the hold notice despite the fact that the hold notice has been made. There is a risk that it will not be demonstrated. On the other hand, the above configuration according to the present embodiment does not cause such inconvenience. Therefore, the effect that the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is given priority as the start target of the game times and the effect that the hold notice is made can be suitably exhibited.

  When the hold notice is started by using the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 as the trigger for execution, the hold information is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb at that time. When the number of game times equal to the number of the hold information is performed, the state in which the current hold notice is to be executed is released. As a result, if a new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower operating port 24 is not performed, the hold notice is supported at each game time, including the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice. The effect that has been performed is executed, and the hold notice for the hold information that is the trigger for the execution can be satisfactorily performed.

  Assuming a configuration in which a hold notice is performed in response to execution of hold information related to the upper action opening 23 in a high-frequency support mode in which winning to the lower action opening 24 is likely to occur, a state in which the hold notice is to be executed On the other hand, new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower operating port 24 is continued, and the release condition of the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is established based on the fact that these newly acquired hold information is the target of the game round It is easy for the situation to occur. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, it is limited that the hold notice should be executed when the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is executed, and thus the above situation occurs. The frequency of performing is reduced. On the other hand, even in the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to execute the hold notice based on the hold information related to the lower operation port 24, so that it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the hold notice. This can be done even while inside.

  When a hold notice is to be executed in response to the hold information related to the upper operating port 23, the hold area Ra for the first result display section and the hold for the second result display section are displayed in the hold notice counter area 128. Information on the total number of pending information stored in the area Rb is set. On the other hand, in a case where the hold notice should be executed with the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 as the trigger for execution, the hold stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit in the hold notice counter area 128 is stored. Information on the number of information is set. The numerical information set in the holding notice counter area 128 is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time the game is started, and the holding notice using the holding information related to the upper operating port 23 as an execution trigger is updated. In either the state to be executed or the state in which the hold advance notice is to be executed using the hold information relating to the lower operation port 24 as the trigger, if the hold advance notice counter area 128 has an initial value, that state Is released. As a result, in any state in which the hold notice is to be executed, the structure of the hold notice counter area 128 or the processing structure for updating the counter area 128 is also used as a structure for determining the release timing. Thus, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the configuration.

  When the hold information related to the upper working port 23 or the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is triggered, a state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set. A state in which the hold notice is to be executed is not newly set by using the hold information acquired after the hold information. Thereby, the state which should perform the holding advance notice triggered by different holding information is not set redundantly. Therefore, the release timing of either the state in which the hold notice is to be executed triggered by the hold information related to the upper working port 23 or the state in which the hold notice is triggered based on the hold information related to the lower working port 24 Even if the counter area for holding notice 128 is also used to determine whether or not the determination is made, there is no problem in processing.

  In addition, in the situation where the hold information that has already been set as the trigger for the hold notice is stored, the hold information that is stored after that is not set as the trigger for the hold notice to be executed. There is no duplication of hold information, and the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice becomes clear. If there is duplicated hold information that triggers a hold notice, it may be necessary to consider other hold information when executing the hold notice related to one hold information, which may complicate processing. By preventing the duplication from occurring, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

  When a new winning to the operation ports 23 and 24 occurs during the game round, a pending notice regarding the pending information acquired based on the winning may be performed in the gaming round. As a result, when a hold notice is made, it is possible to shorten the time from when a winning is made to the operating ports 23 and 24 until the hold notice is made. The opportunity to confirm is increased.

  Even if a change notice display of a symbol is made during the game round while the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, the symbol variable display time already determined in the game round is not changed. As a result, the time required to digest each game time may vary in a configuration in which a holding notice may be given at that game time even while the symbol display is changing. Is suppressed. In addition, if the game display where the hold notice is made is set with a variable display pattern for the hold notice from the beginning of the game time, the contents of the hold information set as the trigger for the hold notice will not be reflected. The variable display time was determined. As a result, in the configuration in which the hold notice can be performed, the time required to digest each game time varies depending on the content of the hold information set to trigger the hold notice. It is suppressed.

  For example, when a hold notice is made, if a variable display time longer than normal is selected or a variable display time shorter than normal is selected, each game time is digested in a situation where a hold notice is given. The time required for this becomes longer or shorter. Then, according to the adjustment method of the angle and direction of the nail provided in the game area, the game hall in which the winning to the operating ports 23 and 24 is relatively likely to occur, and the winning to the operating ports 23 and 24 are performed. There is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time with the game hall where it is relatively difficult to generate. In other words, in the former game hall, there is a high possibility that a plurality of pieces of hold information are already stored at the timing when the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice is stored, while in the latter game hall, the possibility is high. Low. In this case, if a variable display time longer than normal is selected, the digestion rate of game times per unit time in the former game hole is lower than that of the latter game hole, and a variable display time shorter than normal is selected. If this is the case, the rate of game times per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than that in the latter game hall. On the other hand, by making the hold notice be made without affecting the variable display time, the hold notice was made without affecting the digestion rate of game times per unit time. An effect can be obtained.

  In a situation in which the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored in the first result display section hold area Ra or the second result display section hold area Rb, the hold information stored after that is used as an opportunity for execution of the hold notice. It was not set. As a result, in a situation where a hold notice is being executed, it is possible to prevent a situation where a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the hold information different from the hold information set as the trigger for the hold notice. .

  In the configuration in which the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is included in the hold command, a signal line (specifically) that electrically connects the main controller 60 and the sound lamp controller 90. Specifically, a connector unit in which a common connector is provided at both ends of a plurality of signal lines), or a signal line (specifically, a plurality of signal lines that electrically connect the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100). An illegal act of illegally removing the current jackpot random number counter C1 value or jackpot type counter C2 value in the main control device 60 by illegally removing the connector unit provided with a common connector at both ends of the signal line. is assumed. In addition to the illegal act, an illegal act of connecting an illegal board to the signal line and acquiring the current value of the big hit random number counter C1 or the value of the big hit type counter C2 in the main control device 60 is performed. It is assumed that As described above, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is acquired, it is erroneously assumed that an illegal act or a start prize for illegally starting and winning a prize at a timing that results in a jackpot winning or a 15R probability variable jackpot result has occurred. There is a concern that fraudulent acts to be detected will cause a great disadvantage to the game hall. On the other hand, instead of transmitting the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a hold command as it is, the information of the result specified in the main controller 60 is sent as a hold command. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the fraud.

  In the open / close execution mode, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of whether the support mode is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode before the shift to the open / close execution mode. In this case, the occurrence of a large number of winnings in the lower operation port 24 in the opening / closing execution mode is suppressed, and accordingly, for example, the ball exit rate in the opening / closing execution mode varies depending on the winning frequency in the lower operation port 24. It can be suppressed.

  However, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 24 becomes the starting point of the game times than the case where the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 23 becomes the target of starting the game times. In the configuration in which a game result that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to occur in the case where the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode in the opening / closing execution mode, a prize is awarded to the lower operation port 24 during the opening / closing execution mode. If the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 24 is not stored at the timing before the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the holding related to winning in the upper operating port 23 immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends. There is a high possibility that the information will be the target of the game round.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information acquired based on the winning at the upper operating port 23 is the game information whose holding information acquired based on the winning at the lower operating port 24 is the start target of the game round. It is more advantageous for the player than it is to be started. Then, for the player, it is preferable that the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 is not the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 24 immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, but the game information is started. Absent.

  On the other hand, in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the player who has confirmed the hold notification is notified of the hold notification by performing the hold notification on the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 24. It is considered that a large amount of hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 24 is stored as much as possible before the opening / closing execution mode is started based on the hold information. In other words, according to this configuration, an active game in which the launch handle 51 is operated so that a winning to the lower working port 24 occurs and a passive game in which the result of the lottery check is correlated with each other. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set by using the hold information related to the upper operation port 23, a condition for releasing the state is different from that in the first embodiment. A configuration for setting the different release conditions will be described below.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first setting process in the present embodiment. The first setting process is executed in step S1714 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27) in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 42, first, in step S2701, a pending notice occurrence lottery process is executed. This process is the same as step S1901 in the first embodiment. In a succeeding step S2702, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2701 is a holding notice occurrence winning. If it is not a holding advance notice winning, this setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the holding notice has been generated, the process proceeds to step S2703.

  In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time is a normal support hold command. If the command is a normal support hold command, determination of a notice symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot is made in step S2704. On the other hand, if the command is not a normal correspondence hold command, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot is executed in step S2705. Then, after executing the process of step S2704 or step S2705, a process for storing the type information of the notice symbol is executed in step S2706. The processes in steps S2703 to S2706 are the same as steps S1903 to S1906 in the first embodiment.

  After executing the process of step S2706, in step S2707, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper operating port 23. If it is transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 23, the first notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2708.

  In the subsequent step S2709, information stored in the first reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is set as information of the reserved advance counter area 128 provided in the work RAM 104. That is, in the first embodiment, when the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the information corresponding to the total number of the hold information at the time when the hold information that triggered the storage is acquired is used for the hold notice. Although it is configured to be set for the counter area 128, in the present embodiment, the hold information of the upper operation port 23 at the time when the hold information that triggered the storage of the first notice condition satisfaction flag is acquired. Information corresponding to the number is set for the pending notice counter area 128.

  Thereafter, in step S2710, the number limit information stored in advance in the program ROM 103 is set in the count limit counter area provided as the count limit measuring means in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104. The setting process ends. As a result, with the hold information relating to the upper working port 23 as a trigger, a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set. This state corresponds to a special notification state triggered by the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 in the present embodiment.

  Here, the number-of-times restriction information is the upper limit of the number of games that can be continued in the state in which the hold notice is to be executed in the situation where the hold notice is to be executed in response to the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 It is information that determined. Although details will be described later, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is that when the number of game times corresponding to the number limit information is digested after the setting, the hold information that triggered the state is the start target of the game time. It is canceled even at a timing earlier than

  Specifically, the number-of-times restriction information is set as numerical information corresponding to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit number that can be held and stored simultaneously. In the pachinko machine 10, the upper limit number of holdings including both the holding information related to the upper operating port 23 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 24 is eight, so the number limit information is a numerical value corresponding to a number of 8 or more. It is set as information. More specifically, the number-of-times restriction information is set as numerical information that is a number “10” so as to be numerical information that is larger by a predetermined additional number than the holding upper limit number.

  On the other hand, if the pending command to be read this time has been transmitted based on a winning to the lower operating port 24, the second notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104 in step S2711. In subsequent step S2712, information stored in the second reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is set as information in the reserved advance notice counter area 128. Thereafter, the setting process ends. As a result, with the hold information relating to the upper working port 23 as a trigger, a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set. This state corresponds to a special notification state triggered by the hold information related to the lower working port 24 in the present embodiment.

  That is, when the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, the lower operation is performed at the time when the hold information that triggers the storage of the second notice condition establishment flag is acquired, as in the first embodiment. Information corresponding to the number of hold information related to the mouth 24 is set for the hold notice counter area 128, and the number limit information is not set for the number limit counter area.

  Next, the second setting process in this embodiment will be briefly described. Note that the second setting process is executed in step S1716 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27) in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 as in the first embodiment.

  In the second setting process in the present embodiment, the processes in steps S2001 to S2004 are executed in the same manner as the second setting process (FIG. 30) in the first embodiment. However, if it is determined in step S2005 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 23, instead of the processing in steps S2006 to S2007, The same processing as Step S2708 to Step S2710 in the first setting processing (FIG. 42) is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2005 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning of the lower operation port 24, the same processing as in steps S2008 to S2009 is executed. .

  Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The update process at the start of the change is executed in step S2206 of the change start process (FIG. 32) in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100, as in the first embodiment.

  In step S2801, the count limit counter area information is updated so that the count limit information stored in the count limit counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by one. In the following step S2802, it is determined whether or not the change command received this time is the first change command.

  If it is the first change command (step S2802: YES), in step S2803, the hold number stored in the first hold number counter area in the various hold number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by one. As described above, the information of the first reserved number counter area is updated. In the subsequent step S2804, processing for deleting the big hit hold flag is executed. This processing is the same as the processing in steps S2604 to S2607 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S2805, it is determined whether or not the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the first notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the updating process is terminated as it is. If the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the hold notice counter area 128 is decremented so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 128 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by 1 in step S2806. Update the information.

  Thereafter, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the counter for limiting the number of times is “0”, and the value stored in the counter area for holding advance notice 128 in step S2808. Is determined to be “0”. As a result, the value stored in the counter for limiting the number of times is not “0” (step S2807: NO), and the value stored in the counter area for holding notice 128 is not “0” (step S2808: If NO, the update process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the value stored in the counter for limiting the number of times is “0” (step S2807: YES) or when the value stored in the counter area for holding notice 128 is “0” (step S2808: YES), after the first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased from the work RAM 104 in step S2809, the updating process is terminated. Incidentally, in the game times when the first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased, an effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed. In other words, when the game times when the first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased are terminated, the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is to be executed is released. It will be.

  If it is determined in step S2802 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command but the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2810. In step S2810, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number of reserved values stored in the second reserved number counter area 122 in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by one. In the subsequent step S2811, processing for deleting the big hit hold flag is executed. This processing is the same as the processing in steps S2609 to S2612 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S2812, it is determined whether or not the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the second notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the updating process is terminated as it is. If the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the hold notice counter area 128 is decremented so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 128 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by 1 in step S2813. Update the information.

  Thereafter, in step S2814, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the pending notice counter area 128 is “0”. As a result, if it is not “0”, the updating process is terminated as it is. If it is “0”, the updating process is performed after the second notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted in step S2815. finish.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is to be executed is released when the game times related to the hold information that is the trigger for setting the state are finished. In addition, even if the game times related to the hold information that triggers the setting of the state are not performed, the game times of the number of times corresponding to the number of times limit information are performed after the hold notice should be executed. It is also canceled if Since the latter condition is set as the release condition, a new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is made after the state in which the hold notice is to be executed triggered by the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is set. Even if the number of games is continued, the number of game times corresponding to the number of times limit information is performed, so that the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is canceled, and the effect related to the hold notice may continue more than necessary. It is suppressed.

  In addition, the number-of-times restriction information is set as numerical information corresponding to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit number that can be stored and held at the same time as described above. In other words, even if the total number of the hold information stored on hold at the timing when the state to execute the hold notice is set triggered by the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is either 3 or 8, Numerical information corresponding to “10” is set as the number-of-times restriction information. As a result, if no new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is performed, the game times including the game times related to the hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the hold notice should be executed are included in each game time. Thus, the presentation corresponding to the hold notice is executed, and the hold notice for the hold information that is the trigger for the setting can be performed well.

  In addition, since only one type of number limit information is stored in advance, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required for the program ROM 103.

  Furthermore, since the former condition is set as the release condition, when the game times related to the hold information that triggers the setting of the state in which the hold notice should be executed are performed, the current state is set. The status that should hold the hold notice is released. As a result, in a configuration in which the number-of-times restriction information is set as numerical information corresponding to a number equal to or greater than the upper limit number of holds, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is later than the game times related to the hold information that triggered the setting. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing for the number of game times. Therefore, if the game turn related to the hold information that has been set as a trigger is set at a timing prior to the number of game times corresponding to the number of times limit information, the game will be held for any game. It will be clear to the player what has been done about the times.

  Since the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is given priority as a game start target, if the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set by using the hold information related to the lower working port 24 as a trigger, The number of game times to be executed before the game times are to be started is determined according to the number of hold information relating to the lower operation port 24 stored at that time. Therefore, when the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is set as an opportunity, the number of pieces of hold information related to the lower operation port 24 stored at the time of setting the state is the state in which the hold notice is to be executed. By adopting a configuration that is maintained for the number of game times, the effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed including the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice.

  In addition to the above-described operational effects, the operational effects regarding the configuration common to the first embodiment are also achieved in the present embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set by using the hold information related to the upper operation port 23, a condition for releasing the state is different from that in the first embodiment. A configuration for setting the different release conditions will be described below.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first setting process in the present embodiment. The first setting process is executed in step S1714 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27) in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 44, first, in step S2901, a pending notice occurrence lottery process is executed. This process is the same as step S1901 in the first embodiment. In a succeeding step S2902, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S2901 is a holding notice occurrence winning. If it is not a holding advance notice winning, this setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the holding notice has been generated, the process proceeds to step S2903.

  In step S 2903, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on winning in the upper working port 23. If it is transmitted based on a winning to the upper working port 23, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to a normal jackpot is executed in step S2904. In this process, a process for determining the type of the symbol used for making the current reservation notice from the symbols assigned with the even number, which is the main symbol corresponding to the non-specific symbol, is executed. In step S2905, a process for storing the type information of the notice symbol is executed. The processing contents of step S2904 and step S2905 are the same as those of step S1904 and step S1906 in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, in step S2906, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104, and in step S2907, information stored in the first reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is It is set as information on the counter area for holding notice provided in the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the setting process ends. As a result, with the hold information relating to the upper working port 23 as a trigger, a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set. This state corresponds to a special notification state triggered by the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 in the present embodiment.

  That is, in this embodiment, when the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set with the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 as an opportunity, either the normal support hold command or the 15R probability change support hold command is received. Even so, the non-specific symbol is set as the notice symbol. Therefore, in a state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is to be executed, the hold notice using the non-specific symbol is used in the game times before the hold information that is set as the trigger. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the hold notice using the specific symbol is not stopped and displayed.

  In the first embodiment, when the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the information corresponding to the total number of the hold information at the time when the hold information that triggered the storage is acquired is used for the hold notice. Although it is configured to be set for the counter area 128, in the present embodiment, the hold information of the upper operation port 23 at the time when the hold information that triggered the storage of the first notice condition satisfaction flag is acquired. Information corresponding to the number is set for the pending notice counter area 128.

  If the hold command that is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning to the lower operating port 24 (step S2903: NO), the hold command that is the current read target is the step S2908. It is determined whether or not the command is a normal correspondence hold command. If the command is a normal correspondence hold command, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to a normal jackpot is executed in step S2909. In step S2910, a notice symbol determination process corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot is executed. Then, after the process of step S2909 or step S2910 is executed, a process for storing the type information of the notice symbol is executed in step S2911. The processes in steps S2908 to S2911 are the same as steps S1903 to S1906 in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, in step S2912, the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104, and in step S2913, information stored in the second reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is It is set as information on the counter area for holding notice provided in the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the setting process ends. As a result, with the hold information relating to the lower operation port 24 as a trigger, a state in which a hold notice is to be executed is set. This state corresponds to a special notification state triggered by the hold information related to the lower working port 24 in the present embodiment.

  In other words, when the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set with the hold information related to the lower working port 24 as a trigger, unlike the case where the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is set as a trigger, the normal correspondence hold When a command is received, a non-specific symbol is set as a notice symbol, and when a 15R probability change corresponding hold command is received, a specific symbol is set as a notice symbol. Further, when the second notice condition establishment flag is stored, the lower operation is performed at the time when the hold information that triggers the storage of the second notice condition establishment flag is acquired, as in the first embodiment. Information corresponding to the number of hold information relating to the mouth 24 is set for the hold notice counter area 128.

  Next, the second setting process in this embodiment will be briefly described. Note that the second setting process is executed in step S1716 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 27) in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 as in the first embodiment.

  In the second setting process in the present embodiment, a process substantially similar to the first setting process is executed. However, if the hold command to be read is transmitted based on a winning to the lower working port 24, the second setting in the first embodiment is used instead of the processing in steps S2908 to S2911. The point of difference is that the processes of steps S2003 to S2004 of the process (FIG. 30) are executed.

  Next, the variation starting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The variation start process is executed in step S2103 of the variation display control process (FIG. 31) in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100, as in the first embodiment.

  In step S3001, as in step S2201 in the first embodiment, information about whether or not the jackpot is won is obtained from the variation command and the type command received this time, if the jackpot is won, the jackpot type information, the jackpot is not won If it is, the information on the presence / absence of reach and the information on the variable display time are grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 102.

  In a succeeding step S3002, it is determined whether or not a notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3003, and a stop result setting process not corresponding to the hold notice is executed. The stop result setting process that does not correspond to the hold notice is the same as step S2204 in the first embodiment.

  When the notice condition establishment flag is stored, various determinations are made in steps S3004 to S3006. Among these, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the notice condition establishment flag stored this time is the first notice condition establishment flag. In step S3005, it is determined whether or not the change command received this time is the second change command. In step S3006, it is determined whether the result grasped in step S3001 is either the grasping result corresponding to the big win or the grasping result corresponding to the reach occurrence.

  As a result, when the currently established notice condition establishment flag is not the first notice condition establishment flag but the second notice condition establishment flag (step S3004: NO), the currently received variation command is the second variation command. If it is the first variation command (step S3005: NO), or if the result obtained in step S3001 does not correspond to either the big win or the reach occurrence (step S3006: NO), step S3007 The stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice is executed at. The stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice performs substantially the same process as the stop result setting process (FIG. 33) corresponding to the hold notice in the first embodiment.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set as triggered by the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as described above, the hold information that has been triggered corresponds to the 15R probability change jackpot result. However, the notice symbol is set to a non-specific symbol. Therefore, when the hold information that triggered the setting of the state is subject to the start of game times without releasing the state where the hold notice should be executed, the currently set notice graphic is used. If the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stopped and displayed even though the game result is a 15R probability variable jackpot result. On the other hand, in the stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, in step S2303, it is confirmed whether or not the above situation has occurred, and the above situation has occurred. If so, the process proceeds to a stop result setting process that does not correspond to the hold notice in step S3003.

  On the other hand, in the variation start processing, since the processing of step S3005 and step S3006 is executed as described above, in a situation where a state in which a holding notice is to be executed is set with the holding information related to the upper working port 23 as an opportunity, When a winning to the lower working port 24 occurs and the hold information corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is acquired, the stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice is not executed. Therefore, in step S2303 in the present embodiment, a winning to the lower operating port 24 occurs in a situation where a holding notice should be executed with the holding information related to the upper operating port 23 as a trigger, and a 15R probability variation big hit is generated. The determination target does not include the content of whether the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result that is different from the currently set notice symbol type information of the result and the normal jackpot result is acquired.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process, the previous notice condition establishment flag stored this time is the first notice condition establishment flag (step S3004: YES), and the fluctuation command received this time is the second fluctuation command (step S3004). If the result obtained in step S3001 corresponds to either a big win or a reach occurrence (step S3006: YES), the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted from the work RAM 104. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003, and a stop result setting process not corresponding to the hold notice is executed.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is to be executed is the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 corresponding to the occurrence of a big win or reach occurrence. When the held information is the start target of the game times, the hold information that is the trigger for the setting is released even if it is the timing before the start of the game times.

  After executing the process of step S3003 or step S3007, in step S3009, a variable display pattern setting process is executed. This process is the same as step S2205 in the first embodiment. Thereafter, in step S3010, the update process at the start of the change is executed, and then the process for starting the change ends.

  Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is the first change command (step S3101: YES), in step S3102, the reserved number stored in the first reserved number counter area in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by one. As described above, the information of the first reserved number counter area is updated. In the subsequent step S3103, processing for deleting the big hit hold flag is executed. This processing is the same as the processing in steps S2604 to S2607 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S3104, it is determined whether or not the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the first notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the updating process is terminated as it is. If the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the hold notice counter area 128 is decremented so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 128 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by 1 in step S3105. Update the information.

  After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the pending notice counter area 128 is “0”. As a result, if it is not “0”, the update process is terminated as it is. If it is “0”, the update process is performed after the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted in step S3107. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command but the second variation command, the process advances to step S3108. In step S3108, the information in the second reserved number counter area is updated so that the number of reserved values stored in the second reserved number counter area 122 in the various reserved number counter areas 122 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S3109, processing for deleting the big hit hold flag is executed. This processing is the same as the processing in steps S2609 to S2612 in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S3110, it is determined whether or not the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored in the work RAM 104. If the second notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the updating process is terminated as it is. If the second notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the hold notice counter area 128 is decremented so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 128 of the work RAM 104 is decremented by 1 in step S3111. Update the information.

  Thereafter, in step S3112, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the pending notice counter area 128 is “0”. As a result, if it is not “0”, the update process is terminated as it is. If it is “0”, the update process is performed after the second notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted in step S3113. finish.

  Next, when the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set with the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 as a trigger, the contents of the effect corresponding to the hold notice and the state in which the hold notice is to be executed are released. The situation will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 47 (a) shows the execution status of the game times, FIG. 47 (b) shows the storage status of the first notice condition establishment flag, FIG. 47 (c) shows the counter value of the pending notice counter area 128, 47 (d) shows the number of hold information related to the upper working port 23, FIG. 47 (e) shows the winning status to the lower working port 24, and FIG. 47 (f) shows the holding information related to the lower working port 24. The number of 47A to 47G show the stop results displayed on the display screen G in each game round.

  First, a case will be described in which a hold notice is started using the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 23 as an opportunity to execute, and an effect corresponding to the hold notice including the game times related to the hold information is executed.

  In the situation where the first notice condition establishment flag has already been stored and the predetermined game round is being executed, a winning to the lower operation port 24 occurs at the timing t1, so that the lower operation port 24 The hold information is newly acquired, and the number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is one. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the game times that have been executed are terminated. Since the game times are game times started in the situation where the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), as the stop result corresponding to the hold notice at the end, it is not specified. The combination of symbols corresponding to the hold notice by the symbol “2” which is a kind of symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t3. In this case, as already described in the pachinko machine 10, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is given priority over the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as the start target of the game times, and as described above, t 1 The hold information related to the lower working port 24 is stored at the timing. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the game turn is started with the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 becomes zero. On the other hand, in the situation where the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is the start of game times, so the value in the hold notice counter area 128 remains as it is without being subtracted. Maintained.

  Then, at the timing of t4, the game times that have been executed up to that point are terminated. Since the game times are game times started in a situation where the first notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), as the stop result corresponding to the hold notice at the end, it is not specified. The combination of symbols corresponding to the hold notice by the symbol “2” which is a kind of symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t5. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the game time is started with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is reduced. 1 is subtracted to 0. In addition, the value of the holding notice counter area 128 is decremented by 1 to “0”, and accordingly, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted. That is, the hold information that is the start target at the timing of t5 is the hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the hold notice should be executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the game times that have been executed are terminated. In this case, because the hold information that is the trigger for setting the state in which the hold notice should be executed and that is the start target of the current game round corresponds to the 15R probability change jackpot result, the game round ends. At this time, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), the combination of jackpot symbols based on the symbol “7” which is a kind of specific symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, the game times related to the hold information that is the start target prior to the hold information that triggered the setting of the state where the hold notice should be executed as described above perform an effect corresponding to the hold notice using non-specific symbols. If the combination of jackpot symbols with specific symbols is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the hold information that triggers the setting of the state that should hold the hold notice, the figure that is stopped and displayed in the state where the hold notice should be executed The type of will be different. However, since the combination corresponding to the jackpot symbol by the specific symbol is stopped and displayed after the performance corresponding to the hold notice is performed by the non-specific symbol, the player is changed from the normal jackpot result to the 15R probability variable jackpot result. Recognize as if promoted.

  In addition, in the situation where the hold information that triggered the setting of the state that should hold the hold notice usually corresponds to the jackpot result, the effect corresponding to the hold notice including the game times related to the hold information that triggered Is executed, the combination of jackpot symbols with the same symbol as the non-specific symbol for holding notice is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the hold information that has been triggered.

  Next, when the hold notice is started with the hold information relating to the winning to the upper working port 23 being executed, and the effect corresponding to the hold notice is ended in the game times prior to the game times related to the hold information. Will be described.

  In the situation in which the first notice condition satisfaction flag is already stored and the predetermined game round is being executed, a prize for the lower operation port 24 occurs at the timing of t7. The hold information is newly acquired, and the number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is one. Then, at the timing of t8, the game times that have been executed up to that point are terminated. Since the game times are game times started in the situation where the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, as shown in FIG. 47 (D), as the stop result corresponding to the hold notice at the end, it is not specified. The combination of symbols corresponding to the hold notice by the symbol “2” which is a kind of symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t9. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is stored at the timing of t7 as described above, at the timing of t9, the game times are started with the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 as a start target. As a result, the number of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 becomes zero. On the other hand, in the situation where the first notice condition establishment flag is stored, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is the start of game times, so the value in the hold notice counter area 128 remains as it is without being subtracted. Maintained.

  However, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 that is the start target of the game times is not hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, but is hold information corresponding to the occurrence of reach. As already described, in the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is to be executed, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 and corresponding to the jackpot result or reach occurrence is When the game round is to be started, it is assumed that the release condition is satisfied, and the currently set hold notice state is released. Therefore, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted at the timing of t9.

  Thereafter, in a situation where the game turn started at the timing of t9 is being executed, when the winning to the lower operating port 24 occurs at the timing of t10, the holding information related to the lower operating port 24 is newly acquired, and The number of the hold information related to the operation port 24 is one. Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the game times that have been executed up to that point are terminated. In this case, as described above, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 that is the start target of the game round is not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, but is the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of reach. As shown in E), the stop result of the outreach is displayed.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing t12. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is stored at the timing of t10 as described above, at the timing of t12, the game times are started with the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 as a start target. As a result, the number of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 becomes zero.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t13, the game times that have been executed up to that point are terminated. In this case, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed has already been released, and no new state in which the hold notice is to be executed has been set. The hold information does not correspond to either the jackpot result or the reach occurrence. Therefore, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 47 (F), the combination of symbols corresponding to the hold notice, the result of stopping the reach reach, and the combination of jackpot symbols are not displayed, and the mere loss result is displayed. Is done.

  Thereafter, a new game is started at the timing of t14. In this case, since the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored, the game time is started with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as a start target, and thereby the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is reduced. 1 is subtracted to 0. In addition, the hold information that is the start target at the timing of t14 is the hold information that triggered the setting of the state in which the hold notice set at the timing of t7 should be executed, but the hold notice should be executed. The state has already been released at timing t9.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t15, the game times that have been executed up to that point are terminated. In this case, the hold information that is the target of starting the current game round usually corresponds to the jackpot result. Therefore, at the end of the game round, as shown in FIG. 47 (G), the combination of jackpot symbols with the symbol “6” which is a kind of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Even if it is desired that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed in the game times prior to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, the lower operation port 24 than the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 In the configuration in which the hold information related to is preferentially digested, if the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result is acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24, the hold information has priority. Therefore, it is impossible in a state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is to be executed. In this case, in the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is to be executed, the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result in the game times triggered by the hold information related to the lower operating port 24 In such a situation, the state to execute the hold notice is canceled. As a result, the state in which the holding notice is to be executed does not continue across the game times in which the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state, and the state in which the combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state is not continued. Canceled when triggered by Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the state in which the hold notice is to be executed ends when the combination of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It becomes easier to recognize if there is.

  In addition, as the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is compared with the configuration in which the hold notice is continued until the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 that has been set as a trigger is set as the start of the game round. When the hold information corresponding to at least the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result is acquired, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is canceled. In the configuration in which such hold information is preferentially digested, it is possible to suppress the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is to be executed more than necessary.

  In addition, when the state where the hold notice should be executed is canceled in the middle of the game times when the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, if the release occurs, the player will receive a hold notice until then. It will be recognized without a sense of incongruity that the combination of the jackpot symbols is a game time that is stopped and displayed.

  When a state in which a hold notice is to be executed triggered by the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is set as an effect corresponding to the hold notice, a hold using a non-specific symbol among a non-specific symbol and a specific symbol The combination of symbols corresponding to the notice is stopped and displayed. Assuming a configuration in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a hold notice using a specific symbol is stopped and displayed as an effect corresponding to the hold notice, the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is acquired based on the winning at the lower operating port 24 In the case where the game is played, a normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times after the game times in which the effect corresponding to the reservation notice using the specific symbol is executed. Then, for a player who was expecting to generate a 15R probability variation jackpot result by visually recognizing the presentation corresponding to the hold notice using a specific symbol, a normal jackpot result would occur against the expectation. There is a risk that it will not be possible to improve the game motivation through execution. On the other hand, as described above, the presentation corresponding to the hold notice is performed using the non-specific symbol, so that the hold notice can be satisfactorily performed without causing the above inconvenience.

  Even in a state in which a hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is to be executed, even when a reach display is performed at the game times triggered by the hold information related to the lower operating port 24 The state in which the hold notice is to be executed is released. Since the hold information that becomes reach display is acquired more frequently than the hold information that usually results in a jackpot result or 15R probability variable jackpot result, the above condition is set as a release condition for the state in which the hold notice should be executed Thus, it is possible to prevent the situation set in a state in which the hold notice should be executed from continuing for a long period of time.

  In addition, even if the state where the hold notice should be executed is canceled halfway due to the establishment of the above conditions, the trigger is the game times in which the reach display is performed, so that the player is subject to the hold notice until then. It will be recognized without a sense of incongruity that the game times are displayed.

  In addition to the above-described operational effects, the operational effects regarding the configuration common to the first embodiment are also achieved in the present embodiment.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Moreover, you may apply the following each structure to embodiment which is not illustrated as an application object of the structure.

  (1) In the first embodiment, when a hold notice is to be executed in response to the hold information related to the upper operating port 23, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit at that time The numerical information corresponding to minus one with respect to the total number of the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit may be set in the hold notice counter area 128. In this configuration, when the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is triggered, the hold notice should be executed, and the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not newly acquired in this state. In such a case, the hold notice is executed up to the game times related to the hold information in the immediately preceding order with respect to the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 that has been triggered by the execution of the hold notice. Therefore, even in the case of this configuration, when a new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not performed while suppressing the state in which the hold notice should be executed from continuing for a long period of time. Thus, the hold notice regarding the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 that has triggered the execution of the hold notice can be satisfactorily performed.

  In addition, even when the hold notice related to the lower operation port 24 is used as a trigger for execution, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit at that time is set. On the other hand, numerical information for minus one piece may be set in the holding notice counter area 128.

  (2) In the first embodiment, when the reservation information relating to the upper operation port 23 is used as a trigger to execute the hold notice, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit at that time In addition, numerical information corresponding to the plus reference number may be set in the holding notice counter area 128 with respect to the total number of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. The reference number may be one or two, or may be three or more.

  In this configuration, it is assumed that a hold notice should be executed with the hold information related to the upper working port 23 as a trigger, and in this state, the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is newly acquired. However, if the number of pieces of reserved information acquired is within the range of the reference number, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the hold notice including the game times related to the hold information that triggered the hold notice. it can. In addition, when the newly acquired number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 exceeds the reference number, the state where the hold notice is to be executed is the sum of the hold information stored at the time of setting the state. Since the number of game times equal to the sum of the number and the above-mentioned reference number is executed, the hold notice should be executed until the game times related to the hold information that triggers the hold notice. As compared with the configuration in which the above is maintained, it is possible to suppress the state from continuing for a long period of time.

  Further, in the above configuration, when the game times related to the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice, or when the game times have ended, the state in which the current hold notice should be executed is released. Good. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the holding notice from being executed until the game times later than the game times related to the holding information that has triggered the execution of the holding notice. In embodying the configuration, a counter area is separately provided for measuring whether or not the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice is the start of the game round, and the counter area is measured. Based on the information, if it is determined that the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice is the start of the game round, the notice condition even if the information in the hold notice counter area 128 is not the initial value A configuration in which the establishment flag is erased is conceivable.

  Note that even when the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is used as a trigger to execute the hold notice, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the second result display portion hold area Rb at that time On the other hand, numerical information corresponding to the plus reference number may be set in the holding notice counter area 128.

  (3) In the first embodiment, when the reservation information related to the upper operation port 23 is used as a trigger for execution, the reservation notice is to be executed, and at that time, the first result display area reservation area Ra The numerical information corresponding to the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold information may be set in the hold notice counter area 128.

  For example, as in the first embodiment, the setting and execution of the hold notice using the hold information related to the upper working port 23 as an opportunity for execution is not performed in the high frequency support mode but in the low frequency support mode. Thus, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not stored and stored at the timing when the hold notice is set to be executed in response to the hold information related to the upper operation port 23. It is considered that only the hold information is stored on hold frequently. Under such circumstances, even if the numerical information corresponding to the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is set in the counter area for reservation notice 128 as described above, the hold related to the upper operation port 23 is set. When the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is not newly acquired in the state where the hold notice set based on the information is to be executed, the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 that is the trigger for the setting is displayed. It is considered that the frequency with which the hold notice is executed including the corresponding game times is high.

  On the other hand, when the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is newly acquired in the state where the hold notification set based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is to be executed, the state where the hold notification is to be executed Is released when a number of game times corresponding to the number of hold information related to the upper operating port 23 stored in the setting of the state is executed, and the hold that triggered the execution of the hold notice Compared to a configuration in which the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is maintained until the game times related to the information are maintained, the state can be suppressed from continuing for a long period of time.

  Note that the above “numerical information corresponding to the number of on-hold information” may be numerical information corresponding to minus one with respect to the number of on-hold information stored in the first result display section holding area Ra. It may be numerical information corresponding to a plus reference number with respect to the number of pieces of holding information stored in the first result display unit holding area Ra. In the latter case, the reference number may be one or two, or may be three or more. Also, in the latter case, when the game time related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice is reached or when the game time is ended, the state in which the hold notice of this time should be executed is released. It is good.

  (4) In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting and execution of the hold notice using the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 as an opportunity for execution are replaced with a configuration that is not performed in the high-frequency support mode, and related to the upper operating port 23 It may be configured such that the setting of the holding notice and the frequency of execution using the holding information as a trigger for execution are lower than in the low frequency support mode. For example, when performing a lottery to determine whether or not the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is set as a trigger for the execution of the hold notice, the probability of setting win is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure set low.

  (5) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is set in the same manner as a trigger for executing the hold notice, regardless of whether the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure to be made. In the high frequency support mode, acquisition of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is likely to occur continuously in a state where the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is to be executed. As in the first embodiment, the state in which the holding notice is to be executed is released when a predetermined number of game times are executed, so that the state continues for a long period of time. Can be suppressed. Moreover, in order to suppress that the state which should perform a pending | holding advance notice continues over a long period, you may apply the structure in the said 2nd Embodiment or the said 3rd Embodiment.

  (6) In the first embodiment, when the reservation notice is to be executed, the information in the reservation notice counter area 128 is incremented by one each time the game is played. It is good also as a structure to be made. In this case, when the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is triggered, the information in the counter area 128 is stored in each result display section hold area Ra, It may be configured such that when the information corresponding to the total number of the hold information stored in Rb is information, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is canceled. In addition, when the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is triggered, the information in the counter area 128 is stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit when setting the state in which the hold notice is to be executed. It may be configured such that the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is canceled when the information corresponds to the number of stored hold information. Even in this configuration, the configuration of the counter area for holding advance notice 128 and the processing configuration for updating the counter area 128 relate to the hold advance notice and the lower operating opening 24 triggered by the hold information related to the upper operating opening 23. It is also used as a configuration for determining the release timing in both of the hold notices using the hold information as a trigger.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the hold notice counter area to be referred to when the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 becomes an execution trigger and the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 become an execution trigger The counter area for holding notice to be referred to in this case may be provided separately. In this case, each of the hold notices for the execution of the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 and the hold notices for the execution of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 may be set redundantly. The release timing of the state in which the hold notice should be executed can be grasped individually.

  (8) In each of the above-described embodiments, even if the hold notice is set to be executed, an individual lottery for determining whether or not the hold notice is executed at each game time is performed at each game time. An effect corresponding to the hold notice may be executed only in the winning game times. In addition, when this configuration is applied to the first embodiment, when the hold notice related to the upper operation port 23 is set to be executed in response to the hold information, the hold notice is supported. When the game times in which the effect is performed are performed for the total number of the holding information stored in the holding areas Ra and Rb for each result display unit at the time of setting the state, or when the holding notice is executed When the game times related to the hold information that has been made are performed, the state in which the hold notice is to be executed may be released. Even in this case, the holding notice that uses the holding information related to the upper operating port 23 as a trigger for executing the holding notice is executed satisfactorily while suppressing the state where the holding notice should be executed for a long period of time. be able to.

  (9) In each said embodiment, it is good also as a structure by which the hold information which concerns on the lower operation port 24 is not set as an opportunity of execution of a hold notice.

  (10) In each of the above-described embodiments, the timing at which the numerical information set in the pending notice counter area 128 is updated so that 1 is subtracted is not limited to the configuration at the start of the game round. It may be at the end of the game round. When this configuration is applied to the first embodiment, the numerical information set in the holding notice counter area 128 is updated so that 1 is subtracted at the end of the game round, and the holding is performed after the update. When the numerical information in the advance notice counter area 128 is an initial value, the state in which the hold advance notice should be executed may be canceled.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the numerical information set in the holding notice counter area 128 is updated so that 1 is subtracted at the start of the game times, the numerical information in the holding notice counter area 128 becomes the initial value after the update. If it is, an effect corresponding to the hold notice may not be executed in the game round. In this case, at the start of the game round, that is, when the winning / losing lottery is performed, the state in which the holding notice is to be executed is released.

  (11) In the second embodiment, the number-of-times restriction information is not limited to numerical information that is a number of “10”, and is a numerical value that is the same as the upper limit number of reservations such as the number of “8”. It may be information, or numerical information that is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of holding such as the number “9”. Also, numerical information such as a number equal to or greater than “10” may be numerical information that is equal to or greater than the number obtained by adding 2 to the upper limit number of reservations. Even in these cases, the number-of-times restriction information is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of reservations, and thus the same effect as that of the second embodiment is achieved with respect to the configuration.

  Further, the number-of-times restriction information may be numerical information that is a number obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of reservations. In this configuration, in a situation where the hold information is stored for the upper limit number of holds, the hold notification related to the upper operation port 23 is triggered and the hold notice should be executed. In the case where the hold information related to is not newly acquired, the hold notice is executed up to the game time immediately before the game time related to the hold information triggered as described above. In other words, the game times related to the hold information that has been triggered as described above are not included in the game times in which the effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed, but the effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed in the game time immediately before the game time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the hold notice has been made for the hold information that triggered the above.

  Note that the upper limit number of holdings is not limited to eight and may be any number as long as it is plural, and the upper limit number of holding information of the holding information related to the upper operating port 23 and the holding upper limit of the holding information related to the lower operating port 24 The numbers are not limited to being the same, and both may be different. Even in this case, the effect as described above can be obtained by setting the number-of-times restriction information as numerical information that is equal to or greater than the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of reservations.

  (12) In the second embodiment, the timing at which the numerical information set in the counter area for limiting the number of times is updated so that 1 is subtracted is not limited to the configuration at the start of the game times. It may be at the end of the game times. When this configuration is applied, at the end of the game time, the numerical information set in the counter for limiting the number of times is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and the numerical information in the counter area for limiting the number of times is updated to the initial value after the update. In such a case, the state in which the hold notice should be executed may be canceled.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the numerical information set in the number limiting counter area is updated so that 1 is subtracted at the start of the game times, the numerical information in the number limiting counter area is the initial value after the update. In that case, it may be configured such that an effect corresponding to the hold notice is not executed in the game round. In this case, at the start of the game round, that is, when the winning / losing lottery is performed, the state in which the holding notice is to be executed is released.

  (13) In the second embodiment, the storage number of the hold information is divided by a plurality of consecutive storage numbers to set a plurality of numerical value ranges, and the number limit information is individually set for each numerical value range. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, each number-of-times limit information is set as numerical information that is equal to or larger than the number minus 1 with respect to the maximum stored number in the corresponding numerical range, and the numerical range that includes a relatively small stored number is The number limit information that is set may be a smaller number than the numerical range in which the number of stored memories is relatively large. As a result, when the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is set as a trigger in a state in which the hold notice is to be executed, in the situation where new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is not performed, The hold notice can be executed so as to continue to the game times related to the hold information, and in the situation where new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is continuously performed, the hold notice should be executed. The state can be appropriately released according to the number of reserved memories at the timing when the hold information that triggered the above is acquired.

  Alternatively, the number-of-times limit information may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the assumed number of stored hold information. In this case, although the storage capacity necessary for preliminarily storing the number-of-times restriction information increases, the “holding storage at the timing at which the holding information that triggered the above is acquired is determined as“ the state in which the holding notice is to be executed ”. It is possible to increase the effect of “can be appropriately canceled according to the number”.

  (14) In the third embodiment, the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is to be executed is that the hold information related to the lower working port 24 is the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability change big hit Although it is canceled when it corresponds to the result, it may be configured not to be released when the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. In the configuration, even if the processing of steps S3004 to S3008 is not executed in the variation start processing (FIG. 45), the opening command is changed as in the command response processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment. If it is received (step S1601: YES), this can be realized by adopting a configuration (step S1603) that deletes the first notice condition satisfaction flag. In this case, the timing at which the first notice condition satisfaction flag is erased is not limited to the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and is in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode or at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. There may be.

  (15) In the third embodiment, in step S3006 of the variation start process (FIG. 45), it is determined only whether or not a reach has occurred, and it is determined whether it is a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result. It is good also as a structure which does not perform. Even in this case, when the opening command is received (step S1601: YES) as in the command handling process (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, the first notice condition satisfaction flag is deleted. With the configuration (step S1603), the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is to be executed is the lower operation port 24 corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability change jackpot result. The game is released when a game is played with the hold information related to starting as a start target.

  (16) Even when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already stored, the hold notification may be set to be executed in response to the newly acquired hold information. In this configuration, when applying a configuration in which the hold notice generation lottery process is executed when setting the state in which the hold notice should be executed as in each of the above embodiments, the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 and the lower operation port 24 are applied. Even if any of the hold information is set as a trigger and a state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set, it may happen that the game times before the game times related to the hold information as a trigger result in a jackpot. On the other hand, when a game round corresponding to the jackpot result is performed, or when a game round corresponding to the jackpot result is performed, the currently set hold notice state is canceled. By doing so, it is prevented that the state in which the holding notice is to be executed is continued across the game times that are the jackpot results.

  In addition, when attention is paid to the operational effect of the configuration in which the state in which the holding notice is to be executed is released in response to the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is given priority as a game turn start target. Instead, any of the on-hold information related to the upper operating port 23 and the on-hold information related to the lower operating port 24 may be configured to start a game round in accordance with the acquisition order, The configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 24 are not distinguished, the configuration having only one type of operating port, or the condition for acquiring the holding information is the operating port. A configuration in which the hold information is acquired based on the operation of the operation unit manually operated by the player rather than the occurrence of winnings in 23 and 24 (that is, the slot machine or the slot machine and the pachinko machine) There against fused gaming machine), it may be applied a configuration in which a state to execute a hold notice as a trigger game times corresponding to the big hit result is released.

  (17) In the third embodiment, as the hold information related to the lower operation port 24, the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 is set as a trigger at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or reach display is acquired. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state for executing the reserved hold notice is canceled. In this case, there may be cases where the game times that are the jackpot result or the game times that are reach display may not be continuous with the game times in which the effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed, but there is a state where the hold notice should be executed. The release timing can be advanced.

  (18) As a condition for canceling the state in which the hold notice should be executed, the following condition may be applied instead of the condition in each of the above embodiments. That is, the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 should be executed may be released at the timing when the hold information related to the lower operation port 24 is newly acquired. . In this case, it is possible to advance the timing at which the state for executing the hold notice is canceled.

  (19) A combination of the condition in the first embodiment and the condition in the third embodiment as a release condition for the state in which the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper working port 23 is to be executed May be applied. Moreover, you may apply combining the conditions in the said 2nd Embodiment, and the conditions in the said 3rd Embodiment. In these cases, the release condition for the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set in stages, and the state can be released more satisfactorily.

  (20) As in the third embodiment, when the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is set with the hold information related to the upper operation port 23 as an opportunity, an effect corresponding to the hold notice using a non-specific symbol is provided. The configuration to be executed may be applied to the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

  (21) In the third embodiment, even in a state where the hold notice set based on the hold information related to the upper operating port 23 is to be executed, an effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed using a specific symbol. It is good also as a structure which can be made.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold information is acquired based on winning to the upper working port 23 or the lower working port 24, information on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 related to the hold information and the big hit type counter A hold command including information on the value of C2 is transmitted from the main control device 60 to a sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100, and for the hold notice in each of the above embodiments. The sub-side control device may have a function as a destination specifying means such as confirmation processing.

  In this case, in order to prevent the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 23 in the high frequency support mode from being set as a trigger for execution of the hold notice, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set in the high frequency support mode. The hold command including information and information on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 may be configured not to be transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the high frequency support mode as in the above embodiments, It is good also as a structure which prevents the process which sets the hold information acquired based on a prize as a trigger of execution of a hold notice is not performed by the control apparatus of a sub side.

  (23) In each of the embodiments described above, the setting and execution of the hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is not performed in the opening / closing execution mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. In other words, the setting and execution of the hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 may be performed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (24) In each of the above-described embodiments, the confirmation process for holding notice corresponding to the pre-specification indicates that the information acquired based on winning to the operating ports 23 and 24 is the holding information for the first result display section Ra or Although it is configured to be executed after being stored in the second result display area holding area Rb, the present invention is not limited to this, and the confirmation process for holding notice is based on winning in the operation ports 23 and 24. It may be configured to be executed after the information is acquired and before the information is stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb as the hold information.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the upper working port 23 as the first starting ball entering portion and the lower working port 24 as the second starting ball entering portion are arranged in parallel vertically. There is no limitation, the positional relationship between the two may be reversed, and the two may be spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the firing handle 51 is operated in the same mode (the same amount of rotation), the game ball can win each of the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. Although the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part are arranged side by side, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the firing handle 51 is operated in the same manner, the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part The positional relationship between the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion may be set so that it is difficult for a game ball to win each of the starting ball entering portions. In this case, a first launch operation aimed at winning a game ball to the first start pitching portion and a second launch operation aiming at winning a game ball to the second start pitching portion are individually set, For the player, the launch handle 51 can be operated with the aim of winning the game ball in the first starting entrance part, and the launch handle 51 is operated with the aim of winning the game ball in the second start entrance part. can do. Moreover, the number of starting ball entering parts is not limited to two, and may be three or more, for example.

  (26) The configuration for switching the lower operating port 24 between the open state and the closed state is not limited to that using the electric accessory 24a, and the lower operating port 24 can appear and disappear from the game board 20 in the game area. The game ball may be awarded to the lower operation port 24 in a state where the game ball protrudes into the game area, and the game ball may be difficult to win in the lower operation port 24 in a state where the game ball is immersed from the game area.

  (27) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information corresponding to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice indicating that the jackpot winning is supported. However, even the hold information corresponding to these jackpot results may be configured to be set as an opportunity to execute a hold notice indicating that the jackpot winning is supported.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold information that has already been set as the trigger for the execution of the hold pre-execution is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit In this situation, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the operating ports 23 and 24 is not newly set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold information is newly set. It may be configured to be set as an opportunity to execute the hold notice.

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, the winning information in the low probability mode is all included in the winning information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and part of the winning information in the low probability mode. However, it may be configured to be included in the winning information in the high probability mode.

  (30) The execution mode of the hold notice is not limited to that in the above embodiments.

  For example, instead of making a reservation notice through a symbol stop result in the symbol display device 31 of each game time, a notice of holding is made by making the display mode at the beginning of the symbol variation display or in the middle a special mode. Also good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a hold notice is displayed by displaying a hold notice character near the middle of the symbol variation display. When the configuration is applied to the third embodiment, a character corresponding to a non-specific symbol may be displayed as the reservation notice character.

  In addition, an individual display area corresponding to the maximum number of hold information of the hold information is set on the display screen of the symbol display device 31, and the number of the hold information stored in the main control device 60 among the individual display areas is handled. In the configuration in which the number of hold information is clearly indicated by performing individual display in the number of individual display areas, the hold notice is given by setting the form of the individual display in the individual display area to the form corresponding to the content of the hold information. It is good also as a structure to perform.

  (31) In each of the above-described embodiments, even the hold information that does not correspond to the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result can be set as a trigger for execution of the hold notice, but is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the hold information other than the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result may be configured not to be set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. In this configuration, in the game times related to the hold information that does not correspond to the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result, the effect set for the hold notice is performed with a predetermined probability. When the effect set for the hold notice is performed, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

  (32) In each of the above embodiments, the type of the jackpot result by the lottery lottery and the lottery lottery relating to the upper operating port 23 and the type of the jackpot result by the lottery lottery and the lottery lottery relating to the lower operating port 24 are completely the same. Or a completely different configuration. Specifically, in the case of a configuration that is completely the same, a configuration in which an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result are not set as the types of jackpot results by the winning lottery and the distribution lottery relating to the upper operating port 23 Alternatively, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result may be set as the types of jackpot results by the success / failure lottery and the distribution lottery relating to the lower operating port 24.

  Further, in the above configuration, by making the number of game balls paid out based on the winning to the upper working port 23 and the number of game balls paid out based on the winning to the lower working port 24, to the upper working port 23, It is good also as a structure where the privilege given to a player by the winning of this and the privilege given to a player by winning to the lower operation port 24 are the same.

  Further, as a jackpot result, a jackpot result that causes a transition to the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode without generating the opening / closing execution mode may be set. In addition, a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the normal gaming state may be set, and a success / failure result that may result in the above disadvantageous gaming state may be set as a success / failure result based on the success / failure lottery.

  (33) In each of the above embodiments, the number of reservations is not limited to a configuration in which the number of first result display area reservation areas Ra is four and the number of second result display area reservation areas Rb is four. , Each may be 3 or 5 or more, and the number of both holdings may be different.

  (34) The method of measuring each time in each of the above embodiments is arbitrary, and the method of counting a predetermined value using the counter area may be an addition type or a subtraction type. Further, the method of monitoring a power failure in the main controller 60 or the like is also arbitrary. The number of rounds in each opening / closing execution mode is also arbitrary.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the configuration of the game ball giving to the winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 22 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly, and has a function of storing the virtual game medium. In the structure which has, it is good also as a structure which provides the said virtual game medium.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 31 may be omitted, and a lottery result such as a success / failure lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, as a support mode of the electric accessory 24a provided in the lower working port 24, a support disabled mode in which the electric accessory 24a is not in an open state is set instead of the low frequency support mode. Good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can win | win the game ball | bowl to the lower action port 24, even if it is a condition where the electrically-driven accessory 24a is a closed state.

  (35) In each of the above embodiments, the reserved ball storage area 64b provided in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 includes the first result display area reservation area Ra as the reservation area for the upper action opening 23, and the lower action opening. The second result display area reservation area Rb is provided as the storage area for 24, but instead of this, the area where the storage information can be stored is the total number of reservations of the upper operation opening 23 and the lower operation opening 24. Each area may be provided with a common holding area in which a partial area in which information indicating which of the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24 is stored is set. As each area of the common reserved area, for example, each area is configured as a storage area such as 1 byte, and a predetermined bit portion of the storage area corresponds to which of the upper operating port 23 and the lower operating port 24 A configuration is possible in which the information is set as a partial area that can be stored. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 includes the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit.

  (36) In each of the embodiments described above, different counters are used for the big hit random number counter and the big hit type counter for the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 23 and the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 24. Also good.

  (37) In each of the embodiments described above, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 31, is the symbol variation display related to winning in the upper operating port 23 or the lower operating port 24? The start corresponding display area for displaying whether it is related to winning a prize may be set on the display screen of the symbol display device 31. In this case, the start corresponding display area may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24, and is common to the upper working port 23 and the lower working port 24. It is good also as a structure which sets an area | region and displays whether it is based on the display content in the said area | region which concerns on the winning opening.

  (38) A variable winning device that is opened and closed in an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to an unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a variable prize that is opened and closed in an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a 15R probability variation jackpot result and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to a normal jackpot result. It is good also as a structure which provides an apparatus separately.

  Also, the type of jackpot result to be distributed when the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode and the case of the low probability mode may be different when the winning lottery wins.

  (39) In each of the above-described embodiments, the transition between the high probability mode and the low probability mode of the success / failure lottery mode is performed when triggered by the occurrence of a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. For example, the high-probability mode may be configured to shift to the low-probability mode when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the high-probability mode. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a high probability mode is entered when a predetermined number of game times are consumed in the low probability mode.

  In addition, when a lottery opportunity different from the jackpot lottery is established, the winning lottery mode transition lottery is performed, and when the winning lottery is promoted in the transition lottery, the low probability mode is changed to the high probability mode. In this case, the high probability mode may be switched to the low probability mode.

  (40) The notification means for which the hold notice is to be made is not limited to the symbol display device 31, and the notice of hold is made on the display screen of a display device provided separately from the symbol display device 31. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the hold notice is performed by setting the movable decorative member as a predetermined notice mode, or the structure may be configured such that the hold notice is performed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit. A configuration may be adopted in which a pending notice is performed by output of sound from the unit, or a construction in which a pending notice is performed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects.

  (41) In each of the above embodiments, the main controller 60 determines whether or not to hold a hold notice, and the hold command is transmitted from the main controller 60 only when a decision to make a hold notice is made. It is good also as a structure. In this configuration, in the situation where the hold information has already been set, even if the hold information is newly stored, a process for preventing the hold information from being set for a new hold notice is performed. It is good also as a structure performed not with the display control apparatus 100 but with the main control apparatus 60. FIG.

  (42) In each of the embodiments described above, in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored and stored, even if the hold information is newly stored, the setting for performing the advance notice for the hold information is not performed. The processing to be performed may be performed by the main controller 60 instead of the display controller 100. Specifically, the main control device 60 may determine whether or not the jackpot winning is included in the hold information, and if the jackpot winning is included, the hold command may not be transmitted.

  (43) In each of the above embodiments, a state corresponding to the 15R probability variable jackpot result is set as a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state, and a state corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as a relatively disadvantageous predetermined gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and an unfavorable predetermined game state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued in the electric accessory 24a after the opening / closing execution mode. . Also, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and an unfavorable predetermined game state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is continued. In addition, a relatively advantageous predetermined gaming state and an unfavorable predetermined gaming state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 24a enters the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode.

  (44) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game time in the main display unit 33 is started based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 60 has performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on the fact that when the conditions for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is determined are satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made thereafter. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent fluctuation | variation display pattern, fluctuation | variation display time, and stop result in the game time are determined. In this case, the main control device 60 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 31.

  (45) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 100 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 90 based on the command output from the main control device 60. Instead, the main control device 60 is used. The display control device 100 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 90 based on the command output from the. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 are provided separately, the control devices 90 and 100 may be configured as a control device on one sub-side. The functions of the sound lamp control device 90 or the display control device 100 may be integrated into the main control device 60, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 90 and the display control device 100 are integrated into the main control device 60. It is good also as a structure.

  (46) By making a hold notice, a game that confirms or predicts a game result for the hold information after the order in which the game round is to be started according to the contents of the hold notice is added, and a game is added. When paying attention to the remarkable effect that diversification is achieved, a configuration in which the hold notice is executed may be essential, and other configurations such as a condition for canceling the state in which the hold notice is to be executed are arbitrary.

  (47) In the high-frequency support mode, it is possible to perform the hold notice satisfactorily by restricting that the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 23 is set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. In the case of paying attention to the above, it is sufficient to make the configuration essential, and other configurations such as a release condition for a state in which the hold notice should be executed are arbitrary.

  (48) In the high-frequency support mode, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 24 is set as a trigger for the execution of the hold notice, so that the game with respect to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode When it is noticed that the person can cope with it appropriately, the configuration may be made indispensable, and other configurations such as a release condition for a state in which the hold notice should be executed are arbitrary.

  (49) When the setting of the state in which the hold notice is to be executed is performed in the middle of the game, the hold notice can be performed from the game time, thereby increasing the frequency of the hold notice being executed. If it pays attention to being performed, the said structure should just be made essential and other structures, such as the cancellation | release conditions of the state which should perform a hold notice, are arbitrary.

  (50) When a state in which the hold notice is to be executed has already been set, there is a state in which the hold notice is to be executed using the hold information acquired after the hold information that triggered the setting of the state. Focusing on the fact that by not setting a new one, there is no duplication of hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice, and the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice becomes clear. In such a case, the configuration may be made indispensable, and other configurations such as a cancellation condition for a state in which the hold notice should be executed are arbitrary.

  (51) In a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is already stored, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, and the hold notice is executed. In the case of paying attention to the fact that it is possible to prevent a situation that would result in a jackpot result in the game times related to the hold information that is different from the hold information that triggered the execution in the Other configurations such as a condition for canceling the state to be executed are arbitrary.

  (52) In the game times in which an effect corresponding to the hold notice is performed, the variable display time is determined without reflecting the contents of the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. If it is noticed that the hold notice can be performed without changing the time required for digesting, it is necessary to make the structure essential, and other structures such as a release condition for the state that the hold notice should be executed are optional. is there.

  (53) Instead of transmitting the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 as a hold command as it is, the information of the result specified in the main controller 60 is sent as a hold command. If it pays attention that it becomes possible to prevent generation | occurrence | production of a fraudulent act, what is necessary is just to make the said structure essential, and other structures, such as the cancellation | release conditions of the state which should perform a hold notice, are arbitrary.

  (54) Other types of gaming machines different from the above-described embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a gaming ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when entering, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is assigned to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Includes a determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
A privilege granting unit (main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
In gaming machines equipped with
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
State setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first setting process and the second setting process in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) When,
In the situation set in the special notification state, when the setting is performed, the specific information at the timing before the special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit becomes the target of the determination of the grant Notification control means (in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for controlling a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 31) so that special notification corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means for the special information targeted is executed. A function to execute the stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice),
When the special notification state is set, when the setting is performed, the specific information corresponding to the determination timing of the special information that is the target of identification by the destination specifying unit or the notification timing of the determination result is set. Even if the situation is not, the release means for releasing the special notification state based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition (first embodiment: variation shown in FIG. 40 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) Function for executing update process at start, second embodiment: function for executing update process at start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 43 in MPU 102 of display control apparatus 100, third embodiment: MPU 102 of display control apparatus 100 In step S3008).
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored or stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is more specific than the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed at the previous timing. Thereby, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the order of the determination of the grant is the target of the grant determination for the special information of the later is obtained. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, when the special notification state is set, even if the timing is not the specific timing corresponding to the determination timing of the special information or the notification timing of the determination result that has triggered the setting, Based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition, the currently set special notification state is released. Thereby, when an unfavorable situation occurs when the special notification state continues, the currently set special notification state is canceled, and the special notification can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A2. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A first start entrance portion (upper operation port 23) and a second start entrance portion (lower operation port 24) that are provided in the game area and into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
With
The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the fact that the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part. Is what
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entrance section, and stores in the second start entrance section. Storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to perform the grant determination in order from the second special information acquired previously,
Further, when the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored in the second special information. A priority unit (a function of executing a data setting process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that makes the above-described grant determination performed;
In the case where the special notification state is set in response to at least the first special information, the release means satisfies a predetermined release condition even if the specific timing is not reached Based on the above, the gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the special notification state is canceled.

  According to the feature A2, the first starting entrance part and the second starting entrance part are provided as the starting entrance part, and the special information acquired based on the entrance into the first starting entrance part is While being stored as the first special information, the special information acquired based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion is stored as the second special information. The second special information is prioritized over the first special information regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of grant determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations will increase the level of attention of the game.

  Here, when the special notification state is set triggered by the first special information, the timing until the specific timing corresponding to the determination timing of the first special information or the notification timing of the determination result is reached. Assuming a configuration in which the special notification state continues, as described above, the second special information is prioritized in the determination of grant over the first special information, so that the first special information is determined to be grant. If the acquisition of the second special information has been continued before, the special notification state will continue accordingly. Then, it is assumed that the situation set in the special notification state will continue for a long period of time, and even though special notification is made, the player gets used to the special notification more than necessary. There is a risk that the effect of performing the above will not be fully exhibited. On the other hand, when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, a predetermined release condition is established even in the situation where the specific timing is not reached. Since the special notification state is canceled based on this, it is possible to prevent the situation set in the special notification state from continuing for a long period of time. Therefore, the excellent effects as already described can be achieved without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  Feature A3. The release means releases the special notification state based on the fact that the second special information is newly acquired in the special notification state set by the first special information as a trigger. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, characterized by:

  According to the feature A3, when the first special information is set as a trigger and the special notification state is set, even if acquisition of the second special information is continued, the situation set in the special notification state is over a long period of time. It is suppressed that it continues.

  Feature A4. In the special notification state set by the first special information as an opportunity, the release means performs the grant determination for a predetermined number of times (number of times corresponding to the number limit information) or The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein when the determination result is notified, the special notification state is canceled.

  According to the feature A4, when the special notification state is set by the first special information as a trigger, the determination of the predetermined number of times is performed or the determination result is notified. In this case, since the special notification state is canceled, even if the second special information is continued, the situation in which the special notification state is set for a long period of time can be suppressed. Further, in this configuration, since it is determined whether or not the release condition is satisfied by monitoring whether or not the grant determination or the notification of the determination result is performed for a predetermined number of times, the configuration related to the determination is simplified. Figured.

  Feature A5. The predetermined number of times may be any number of special information already stored when the special notification state is set, before the special information that triggers the setting. The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the gaming machine is set to be equal to or greater than the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.

  According to the feature A5, when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information and the second special information is not newly acquired after that, at least the special notification state is set. The special notification state is continued until the special information in the immediately preceding order becomes the target of the determination for the first special information that has been set as the trigger for setting or until the determination result is notified. Accordingly, when the second special information is not newly acquired while suppressing the situation set in the special notification state from continuing for a long period of time, the trigger for setting the special notification state Special notification about the first special information that has become can be performed well.

  Feature A6. The predetermined number of times is set as a constant number regardless of the number of special information already stored when the special notification state is set. A4 or A5 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A6, whether or not the release condition is satisfied regardless of the number of special information already stored when the special notification state is set triggered by the first special information. Since the numerical information for determining is constant, the storage capacity necessary for storing the numerical information in advance can be reduced.

  Feature A7. The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the predetermined number of times is set as a number that is one or more less than the specified number.

  According to the feature A7, when the special notification state is set with the first special information as a trigger, the special notification state is set regardless of the number of special information already stored. When the second special information is not newly acquired later, the special information in the immediately preceding order is subject to the determination of at least the first special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. The special notification state continues until or until the determination result is notified. As a result, the storage capacity necessary for preliminarily storing numerical information for determining whether or not the release condition is satisfied is reduced, and the situation where the special notification state is set continues for a long period of time. In the case where new acquisition of the second special information is not performed while suppressing the occurrence of the special notification, the special notification about the first special information that has triggered the setting of the special notification state can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A8. Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the game turn operation is ended so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling predetermined notification means or different notification means (function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function for executing variable display control processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) With
The notification control means is configured to cause the special notification to be performed in a state associated with the game turning operation in a situation where the special notification state is set,
The release means releases the special notification state when a predetermined number of game times have been performed in the special notification state set by the first special information as a trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A7.

  In the configuration in which the special notification is performed in the situation where the game turning operation is performed, the effect of giving priority to the second special information in the grant determination and the effect of performing the special notification can be satisfactorily achieved. .

  The notification control means may be configured to perform the special notification by setting the mode of the game turn operation as a special mode in a situation where the special notification state is set.

  Further, the notification means includes a display means having a display screen, and in each game time, the game determination operation is performed before or after the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. In the configuration in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the display is performed, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed, and the variation display of the pattern is terminated, the notification control unit includes the In the situation where the special notification state is set, the special notification may be performed by setting a stop result of the variable display of the pattern as a special mode.

Feature A9. An acceptance control means (main control unit) capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easier to enter. A function of executing the electric power support process in the MPU 62 of the control device 60,
The acceptance control means includes a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode, as the control mode of the second starting and entering part. And
In the case of the second mode, there is provided a restricting unit (a function for executing the process of step S1712 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for restricting the setting of the special notification state triggered by the first special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A8, wherein:

  Assuming a configuration in which the special notification state is set at a predetermined frequency triggered by the first special information in the situation of the second mode, the special notification about the first special information is started. Regardless, the second starting information is continuously entered at the timing before the first special information is subject to the grant determination, and the newly acquired second special information is subject to the grant determination. It becomes easy to generate a situation in which the release condition for the special notification state is satisfied based on the situation. On the other hand, according to the feature A9, in the second mode, the setting of the special notification state is restricted by the first special information as a trigger, so the frequency at which the above situation occurs Is reduced.

  Feature A10. In the second mode, the restriction means restricts the setting of the special notification state triggered by the first special information, while setting the special notification state triggered by the second special information. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the gaming machine is not limited to be performed.

  According to the feature A10, in the second mode, the setting of the special notification state is restricted with the first special information as a trigger, while the special notification state is set with the second special information as a trigger. What is done is not limited. Thereby, special notification can be executed even in the second mode, and while the effect of the feature A9 is achieved, improvement in the degree of attention of the game through the special notification is in the second mode. Can also be planned.

Feature A11. The release means is
First release means for releasing the special notification state based on the fact that the specific timing has been reached (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2808 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 and executing the processing in step S2809);
Even in a situation where the specific timing is not reached, the second canceling unit (in step S2807 in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) cancels the special notification state based on the establishment of the predetermined canceling condition. A function of making an affirmative determination and executing the process of step S2809),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, in a situation where a predetermined release condition is not satisfied, the special notification state is continued until the specific timing is reached, so that the special notification regarding the special information that has been a trigger for the setting can be performed well. It can be carried out. On the other hand, in a situation where a predetermined release condition is not established, the special notification state is released at a specific timing instead of being continued indefinitely. The special notification state is canceled at a preferable timing for performing the special notification on the information.

  In particular, by applying the configuration of the feature A11 to the gaming machine having the configuration limited by the feature A6 or A7, the effect is based on the configuration of the feature A6 or A7. In a situation where the release condition is not satisfied, the special notification state is canceled at a timing that is preferable for performing special notification of the special information that has triggered the setting.

  Feature A12. In the release means, the content of the special information subject to the grant determination is a predetermined content (normal jackpot result, 15R probability variable jackpot result or reach display) before the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the special notification state is canceled based on the content).

  According to the feature A12, the special notification state is canceled according to the content of the special information that is the subject of the grant determination prior to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state. Therefore, for example, if the special notification state is continued across the grant determination timing or the notification timing of the determination result for the special information whose order is earlier than the special information that triggered the setting, the target of the special notification for the player In a situation where it is difficult to recognize what it is, the special notification state is canceled even if the specific timing is not reached. Thereby, special alerting | reporting can be performed favorably.

  Feature A13. The release means includes the special information whose specific result by the destination specifying means becomes the predetermined specific result, the special information subject to the determination of the grant before the special information that triggers the setting of the special notification state. The game machine according to Feature A12, wherein the special notification state is canceled based on the information stored in the acquired information storage means.

  According to the feature A13, when the special information that can trigger the setting of the special notification state is the target of the determination before the special information that triggers the setting of the special notification state that is currently set, or the grant determination The special notification state is canceled in the case of becoming a target. Therefore, in a situation where it is difficult for the player to recognize what the target of the special notification is when the special notification state is continued, the special notification state is canceled even if the specific timing is not reached. Notification can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A14. Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game-return action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the predetermined notification means or a different notification means (function for executing the game time control process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function for executing the variable display control process in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) )
In the feature A12 or A13, the notification control unit is configured to perform the special notification in a state associated with the game turn-in operation in the situation where the special notification state is set. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A14, in the configuration in which the special notification is performed in a state associated with the game turning operation, the effect based on the configuration of the feature A12 and the like can be achieved.

  Feature A15. The release means is based on the fact that an operation for game times that is the result of the game corresponding to the game times prior to the game times related to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state is performed or the grant The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the special notification state is canceled prior to the game turning operation as a response result.

  According to the feature A15, it is difficult for the player to recognize what the target of the special notification is, because the special notification state is not continued across the game rotation operation that is the grant correspondence result, Special notification can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, when the special notification state is canceled even if the specific timing is not reached, the player can receive a special notification up to that time when the cancellation occurs due to the game turning operation resulting in the grant response result. It will be recognized without a sense of incongruity that it is a game-return action resulting in the grant correspondence result. Also from this point, according to the present configuration, special notification can be performed satisfactorily.

  Feature A16. The state setting means has a specifying result that the specific information by the destination specifying means corresponds to the given information, and a state setting lottery means (in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100). The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the special notification state is set when a lottery result of a function for executing a holding notice occurrence lottery process is a winning result.

  According to the feature A16, the special notification state is set irregularly, and the setting is diversified. In addition, in this configuration, even if it is special information corresponding to the grant information, it may not trigger the setting of the special notification state, so the game related to the special information that triggered the setting of the special notification state In the game times prior to the game times, the game turn operation that is the result of the grant correspondence can be performed, but by providing the configuration of the feature A15, special notification can be performed well even in such a situation. .

Feature A17. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A first start entrance portion (upper operation port 23) and a second start entrance portion (lower operation port 24) that are provided in the game area and into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
With
The information acquisition unit acquires special information based on the fact that the predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part. Is,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entrance section, and stores in the second start entrance section. Storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to perform the grant determination in order from the second special information acquired previously,
Further, when the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored in the second special information. The game according to any one of features A14 to A16, further comprising priority means (a function of executing a data setting process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) so as to make the assignment determination. Machine.

  According to the feature A17, the first starting entrance part and the second starting entrance part are provided as the starting entrance part, and the special information acquired based on the entrance to the first starting entrance part is: While being stored as the first special information, the special information acquired based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion is stored as the second special information. The second special information is prioritized over the first special information at the time of grant determination regardless of the acquisition timing. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations can increase the attention of games.

  Here, in the configuration in which the second special information is prioritized over the first special information at the time of grant determination regardless of the acquisition timing, the specific notification timing is set at the timing when the special notification state is set with the first special information as a trigger. It is unclear what kind of special information game times will be executed by the time. If it does so, there exists a possibility that it may become difficult to recognize what the special alert | report object is for a player until it becomes a specific timing. On the other hand, by providing a configuration limited to the feature A12 or the like, the specific timing is not reached in the situation where it is difficult for the player to recognize what the special notification target is as described above. However, since the special notification state is canceled, the special notification can be performed well.

  Feature A18. The release means is an operation for game times that is the result of granting in the game times related to the second special information newly acquired in the situation where the special notification state is set in response to the first special information. The gaming machine according to feature A17, wherein the special notification state is canceled based on the fact that the special notification state has been performed based on the fact that the special response state has been performed or prior to performing the game turning operation resulting in the grant correspondence result.

  In the configuration in which the first special information is prioritized over the second special information at the time of grant determination regardless of the acquisition timing, the second corresponding to the grant correspondence result in the special notification state set by the first special information as an opportunity. It is assumed that special information is acquired. On the other hand, according to the feature A18, in the case of the game corresponding to the second special information newly acquired in the special notification state set with the first special information as an opportunity, the result of the grant response is The special notification state is not continued across the game times. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize what the target of special notification is, and makes it possible to perform special notification satisfactorily.

  In addition, when the special notification state is canceled even if the specific timing is not reached, the player can receive a special notification up to that time when the cancellation occurs due to the game turning operation resulting in the grant response result. It will be recognized without a sense of incongruity that it is a game-return action resulting in the grant correspondence result. Also from this point, according to the present configuration, special notification can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature A19. Provided information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 63a and distribution table storage area 63b of the main control device 60) for storing the provision information in advance, the grant information storage means includes first grant information and second grant information as the grant information. Pre-stored grant information,
The privilege granting means
First state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a first grant correspondence result corresponding to the first grant information. The function of executing the processing of step S1111 to step S1114 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the second grant correspondence result corresponding to the second grant information, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. 2 second state transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1102 to S1105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) to shift to a predetermined gaming state;
With
The first notification result is set as the aspect of the notification result of the game times performed when the special information corresponding to the first grant information is the target of the grant determination, and corresponds to the second grant information The second notification result is set as the notification result of the game times performed by the special information being made being the target of the grant determination,
In the case where the special notification is performed when the special notification state is set at least when the first special information is triggered, the notification control means changes the game operation operation mode to the first notification result. And a special mode setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2904 in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) as a special mode corresponding to the first notification result among the second notification results. The gaming machine according to feature A17 or A18.

  In the gaming machine of feature A19, since the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state are set as the gaming state to be shifted based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result, Diversification will be achieved. Moreover, it becomes a 1st alerting | reporting result in the game time from which the transition to a 1st predetermined game state will generate | occur | produce, and it becomes a 2nd alerting | reporting result in the game time from which the transition to a 2nd predetermined game state will generate | occur | produce. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the result of the grant determination.

  In this case, at least when the first special information is triggered, and the special notification state is set, the mode of the game turning operation corresponds to the first notification result among the first notification result and the second notification result. Special notification is performed by setting it as a special mode. Assuming a configuration in which the mode of the game rotation operation is set to a mode corresponding to the second notification result as the special notification, the special notification is performed after the special notification corresponding to the second notification result is performed and the specific timing is reached. For a player who has confirmed the special notification corresponding to the second notification result and has expected the transition to the second predetermined gaming state in the case where the game times that are the first notification result have been performed before, this is against expectations. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game willingness through the special notification cannot be improved suitably because the state shifts to the first predetermined game state which is more disadvantageous than the second predetermined game state. On the other hand, since the special notification is performed by changing the mode of the game turning operation to the special mode corresponding to the first notification result as described above, the special notification is performed without causing the above-described inconvenience. It can be done well.

  Note that the “special mode setting means” is configured to display the game result notification mode when the special notification is performed at least when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information. Of the first notification result and the second notification result, a special notification result corresponding to the first notification result may be used.

Feature A20. Provided information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 63a and distribution table storage area 63b of the main control device 60) for storing the provision information in advance, the grant information storage means includes first grant information and second grant information as the grant information. Pre-stored grant information,
The privilege granting means
First state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a first predetermined gaming state based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a first grant correspondence result corresponding to the first grant information. The function of executing the processing of step S1111 to step S1114 in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60),
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the second grant correspondence result corresponding to the second grant information, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined gaming state. 2 second state transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1102 to S1105 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) to shift to a predetermined gaming state;
With
The gaming time control means sets the first notification result as the notification result of the gaming times performed when the special information corresponding to the first grant information is the target of the grant determination, and the second The special information corresponding to the grant information is the subject of the grant determination, and the mode of the game round notification result is the second stop result.
In the case where the notification control means performs the special notification, the mode of the game turn operation is set to a special mode corresponding to the first notification result among the first notification result and the second notification result. A gaming machine according to any one of features A14 to A18, comprising means (function for executing the processing of step S2904 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100).

  In the gaming machine of feature A20, since the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state are set as the gaming state to be shifted based on the result of the grant determination being the grant correspondence result, Diversification will be achieved. Moreover, it becomes a 1st alerting | reporting result in the game time from which the transition to a 1st predetermined game state will generate | occur | produce, and it becomes a 2nd alerting | reporting result in the game time from which the transition to a 2nd predetermined game state will generate | occur | produce. It becomes easier for the player to recognize the result of the grant determination.

  In this case, at least when the first special information is triggered, and the special notification state is set, the mode of the game turning operation corresponds to the first notification result among the first notification result and the second notification result. Special notification is performed by setting it as a special mode. Assuming a configuration in which the mode of the game rotation operation is set to a mode corresponding to the second notification result as the special notification, the special notification is performed after the special notification corresponding to the second notification result is performed and the specific timing is reached. For a player who has confirmed the special notification corresponding to the second notification result and has expected the transition to the second predetermined gaming state in the case where the game times that are the first notification result have been performed before, this is against expectations. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game willingness through the special notification cannot be improved suitably because the state shifts to the first predetermined game state which is more disadvantageous than the second predetermined game state. On the other hand, since the special notification is performed by changing the mode of the game turning operation to the special mode corresponding to the first notification result as described above, the special notification is performed without causing the above-described inconvenience. It can be done well.

  In the case of performing the special notification, the “special mode setting means” sets the mode of the game round notification result as a special notification result corresponding to the first notification result among the first notification result and the second notification result. It is good also as a structure.

Feature A21. The predetermined notification means is a pattern display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of patterns in a predetermined order in each of a plurality of variable display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3).
The game times control means may display a variation of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means. Is stored in the acquired information storage means as one game time that the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed and the variation display of the pattern in the plurality of variation display areas is terminated. The design display means is controlled so that the display of the variation of the design of each game time is performed according to the special information being
Further, the first notification result is set as an aspect in which a combination of the first grant target patterns formed by the patterns that are variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is stopped and displayed on one effective line. At the same time, the second notification result is set as an object on which a combination of the second grant target pictures formed by the pictures that are variably displayed in the plurality of variability display areas is stopped and displayed on one active line. ,
The special mode setting means is configured to cause the special notification to be performed by displaying a special mode using a pattern constituting the combination of the first grant target patterns in the display of the variation of the pattern. A gaming machine according to Feature A19 or A20, characterized by

  According to the feature A21, in the gaming machine in which the change display of the pattern is performed at each game time, it is possible to achieve the operational effects described as corresponding to the configuration of the feature A19 or the feature A20.

Feature A22. The notification control means uses, as the special mode, an aspect of a result of stopping the game times related to the special information subject to the grant determination before the special information that triggers the setting of the special notification state. The combination of the special display object patterns different from the combination of the object patterns to be applied is stopped and displayed at a position different from the effective line or the effective line. It is assumed that the mode is
The special mode setting means is characterized in that the special notification is performed by stopping and displaying a combination of a special notification target pattern configured using a pattern constituting the combination of the first grant target patterns. The gaming machine according to Feature A21.

  According to the feature A22, when the special notification is performed, the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed, so that the mode in the case where the special notification is performed becomes clear and the player is notified that the special notification is being performed. It becomes easy to recognize. In such a gaming machine, the effects described as corresponding to the configuration of the feature A19 or the feature A20 can be achieved.

  In any one of the features A18 to A22, the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state may be the following gaming states. In other words, the transition determination means includes a high probability transition determination means and a low probability transition determination means in which the probability of the transition correspondence result is relatively high, and the first predetermined gaming state is determined by the transition determination. Of the high probability transition determination means and the low probability transition determination means is a gaming state in which the transition determination is performed by the low probability transition determination means, and the second predetermined gaming state is the transition determination In the game state in which the transition determination is performed by the high probability transition determination unit among the high probability transition determination unit and the low probability transition determination unit, the first predetermined gaming state A difference may be provided between the second predetermined gaming state and the advantage.

  In addition, a variable entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a closed state in which entry is difficult to enter, and the variable entry means are opened. Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to a closed state after entering the state, and providing means for giving a game ball to the player based on the game ball entering the variable entry means; And when the game state transition to the first predetermined game state occurs by the first state transition means, the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable pitching means is a predetermined number of times The variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means until the first predetermined gaming state is shifted to the second predetermined gaming state by the second pitch transition control means until the second predetermined gaming state is reached. Transition started In this case, the variable entry control is performed by the variable entry control means and the second predetermined game is performed until the number of times of switching between the open state and the closed state in the variable entry means reaches a predetermined number. It is good also as a structure by which the transition to a state is performed.

Feature A23. Prior to the application determination being performed by the application determination unit or based on the application determination being performed by the application determination unit, a variation display of a pattern is started in a plurality of variable display areas, and the application determination Each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the stop result corresponding to the determination result as one game time that the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of variable display areas is terminated. Game control means for controlling the predetermined notification means or a different notification means so as to display the variation of the picture (function for executing the game time control process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, display control device 100) The function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 102 of
The game times control means indicates a state of a result of stopping the game times performed when the special information corresponding to the grant information is a target of grant determination on one effective line, the plurality of picture display areas. In a mode in which the combination of the pattern to be applied formed by the pattern that is variably displayed in is stopped and displayed,
Further, the display of each game time is stopped to display on the effective line a reach pattern that may be a combination of the above-mentioned grant target patterns by stopping the display of the patterns in some of the variable display areas. A reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, a reach display mode is provided that displays a variation display of the pattern in the remaining variation display area,
The release means is in a state set in the special notification state, and the reach display mode has been performed in the game times prior to the game times related to the special information that triggered the setting, or The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A22, wherein the special notification state is canceled based on a situation where a reach display mode is set.

  According to the feature A23, since the special notification state is not continued across the game times in which the reach variation display is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize what the target of the special notification is, and the special notification state is difficult to occur. Notification can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, even when the specific notification timing is not reached, the trigger for releasing the special notification state is the game times in which the reach fluctuation display is performed. Will be recognized without a sense of incongruity that the game times have the reach change display. Also from this point, according to the present configuration, special notification can be performed satisfactorily.

  In addition, when the configuration limited in the feature A17 is provided, the release unit is in a state where the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, and is newly acquired. Based on the fact that the reach variation display is performed in the game times related to the second special information, or prior to the game times where the reach variation display is performed, the special notification state that is currently set is canceled. Also good. In this case, even if it is postponed that it becomes a specific timing by acquiring the second special information continuously in the special notification state set with the first special information as a trigger, the second corresponding to the reach fluctuation display The special notification state is canceled based on the newly acquired special information. And since the special information used as reach fluctuation display is acquired at a predetermined frequency, it is possible to suppress the situation set in the special notification state from continuing for a long period of time.

Feature B1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 23, lower operation port 24) provided in the game region and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game region;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is assigned to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Includes a determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means (main control device) for granting a privilege to the player A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part (upper operating port 23) and a second starting entrance part (lower operating port 24) as the starting entrance part,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entrance section, and stores in the second start entrance section. Storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to perform the grant determination in order from the second special information acquired previously,
Further, when the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored in the second special information. Priority means (a function for executing data setting processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) so that the above-mentioned grant determination is performed;
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
State setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first setting process and the second setting process in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) When,
In the situation that is set in the special notification state, when the setting is performed, the special information that has been specified by the destination specifying unit at a timing prior to the target of the grant determination, Notification control means (MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for controlling predetermined notification means (the symbol display device 31) so that special notification corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means for the special information to be specified is executed. Function to execute the stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice in),
In the case where the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the grant determination for the number of times corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. A release means (a function for executing an update process at the start of fluctuation in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) that cancels the special notification state when it is performed or when the determination result is notified;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the first starting entrance part and the second starting entrance part are provided as the starting entrance part, and the special information acquired based on the entrance to the first start entrance part is While being stored as the first special information, the special information acquired based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion is stored as the second special information. The second special information is prioritized over the first special information regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of grant determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations will increase the level of attention of the game.

  In addition, a special notification corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored or stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is a timing before the special information is subject to grant determination. May be executed in As a result, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering section and the game that confirms the determination result of the special information acquired based on the game, but at least the acquired information When a plurality of special information is stored in the storage means, confirm the result in the case where the order of the determination of the grant is the target of the grant determination according to the content of the special notification. A game of prediction is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Here, when the setting of the special notification state is performed with the first special information as a trigger, it is assumed that the special notification state continues until the grant determination is performed on the first special information. As described above, the second special information is prioritized in the determination of grant over the first special information, and therefore when the acquisition of the second special information is continued before the first special information is determined to be granted. Therefore, the special notification state will be continued accordingly. Then, it is assumed that the situation set in the special notification state will continue for a long period of time, and even though special notification is made, the player gets used to the special notification more than necessary. There is a risk that the effect of performing the above will not be fully exhibited. On the other hand, when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the number of times corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. Since the special notification state is canceled when the grant determination is performed or when the determination result is notified, there is a situation where the special notification state is set even if acquisition of the second special information is continued. It is suppressed that it continues over a long period of time. Therefore, the above-described effects can be suitably exhibited without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  Feature B2. When the special notification state is set by the first special information as an opportunity, the release means is stored in the acquired information storage means before the special information that triggers the setting. The special notification state is canceled when the grant determination is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of special information that is equal to or more than the number of special information that has been made or when the determination result is notified. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  According to the feature B2, when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information and the second special information is not newly acquired after that, at least the special notification state is set. The special notification state is continued until the special information in the immediately preceding order becomes the target of the determination for the first special information that has been set as the trigger for setting or until the determination result is notified. Accordingly, when the second special information is not newly acquired while suppressing the situation set in the special notification state from continuing for a long period of time, the trigger for setting the special notification state Special notification about the first special information that has become can be performed well.

  Feature B3. In the case where the special notification state is set when the first special information is triggered, the releasing means is the same number of times as the number of special information already acquired when the setting is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the special notification state is canceled when the grant determination is performed for a minute or when the determination result is notified.

  According to the feature B3, when new acquisition of the second special information is not performed, when the grant determination is performed for the first special notification that triggers the setting of the special notification state, or the determination result is notified. Thus, the special notification state is continued including the case where the special notification state is performed, and the special notification about the first special information that triggers the setting of the special notification state can be performed well. Further, even if the acquisition of the second special information is continued when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the special notification state is already acquired when the setting is performed. The status is set to the special notification state for a long period because it is canceled when the same number of grants as the number of special information is determined or when the determination result is notified. Can be suppressed.

Feature B4. Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the game turn operation is ended so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function to execute variable display control processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) for controlling the notification means or different notification means. ,
The notification control means is configured to cause the special notification to be performed in a state associated with the game turning operation in a situation where the special notification state is set,
In the case where the special notification state is set when the first special information is triggered, the releasing means is a number of times corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the special notification state is canceled when the game is played for minutes.

  In the configuration in which the special notification is performed in the situation where the game turning operation is performed, the effect of giving priority to the second special information in the grant determination and the effect of performing the special notification can be satisfactorily achieved. .

  The notification control means may be configured to perform the special notification by setting the mode of the game turn operation as a special mode in a situation where the special notification state is set.

  Further, the notification means includes a display means having a display screen, and in each game time, the game determination operation is performed before or after the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means. In the configuration in which the variation display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the display is performed, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed, and the variation display of the pattern is terminated, the notification control unit includes the In the situation where the special notification state is set, the special notification may be performed by setting a stop result of the variable display of the pattern as a special mode.

Feature B5. An acceptance control means (main control unit) capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easier to enter. A function of executing the electric power support process in the MPU 62 of the control device 60,
The acceptance control means includes a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode, as the control mode of the second starting and entering part. And
In the case of the second mode, there is provided a restricting unit (a function for executing the process of step S1712 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for restricting the setting of the special notification state triggered by the first special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein:

  Assuming a configuration in which the special notification state is set at a predetermined frequency triggered by the first special information in the situation of the second mode, the special notification about the first special information is started. Regardless, the second starting information is continuously entered at the timing before the first special information is subject to the grant determination, and the newly acquired second special information is subject to the grant determination. It becomes easy to generate a situation in which the release condition for the special notification state is satisfied based on the situation. On the other hand, according to the feature B5, in the second mode, the setting of the special notification state is restricted by the first special information as a trigger, so the frequency at which the above situation occurs Is reduced.

  Feature B6. In the second mode, the restriction means restricts the setting of the special notification state triggered by the first special information, while setting the special notification state triggered by the second special information. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein the gaming machine is not restricted from being performed.

  According to the feature B6, in the second mode, the setting of the special notification state is restricted with the first special information as a trigger, while the special notification state is set with the second special information as a trigger. What is done is not limited. Thereby, special notification can be executed even in the second mode, and while the effect of the feature B5 is exerted, improvement in the degree of attention of the game through the special notification is in the second mode. Can also be planned.

  Feature B7. In the case where the special notification state is set when the first special information is triggered, the canceling unit is configured to store the first special stored in the acquired information storage unit when the setting is performed. The special notification state is canceled when the grant determination corresponding to the total number of information and the second special information is performed or when the determination result is notified, and the second special information is released. When the special notification state is set in response to the trigger, the number of times corresponding to the number of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the setting is made The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the special notification state is canceled when the grant determination is performed or when the determination result is notified.

  According to the feature B7, when the special notification state is set triggered by the second special information, the numerical information referred to in specifying whether or not the release condition is satisfied is different except that The setting of the special notification state is canceled with the same configuration as when the special notification state is set by using one special information as a trigger. Moreover, even if it is the structure by which the setting of special alerting | reporting state is cancelled | released by the same structure in this way, since 2nd special information has priority over 1st special information with respect to provision determination, special alerting | reporting state The release timing of the setting is not affected by the acquisition of new first special information or new second special information. Notification can be performed.

Feature B8. In a situation where the special notification state is set, a measurement unit (holding advance notice counter area 128) that updates measurement information when the determination is made or when the determination result is notified. Prepared,
In the case where the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the release unit stores the first information stored in the acquired information storage unit when the setting is performed. The special notification state is canceled based on the number of updates corresponding to the total number of special information and the second special information being performed on the measuring means, and the second special information is triggered. When the special notification state is set, the number of updates corresponding to the number of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the setting is performed is the measurement. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the special notification state is canceled based on what is performed on the means.

  According to the feature B8, the measurement is performed regardless of whether the special notification state is set with the first special information as a trigger or the special notification state is set with the second special information as a trigger. The release timing is determined through the number of updates of the means. That is, in any special notification state, the measurement unit or the processing configuration for updating the measurement unit is also used as a configuration for determining the release timing. As a result, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained while simplifying the configuration.

  Feature B9. While the special notification state is set triggered by either the first special information or the second special information, the information acquisition is performed later than the special information triggered by the setting of the special notification state. It is provided with setting restriction means (a function for executing the processing of step S1709 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for restricting the special notification state from being newly set in response to the special information acquired by the means. The gaming machine according to Feature B8.

  According to the feature B9, the special notification state is not set redundantly with different special information as a trigger. Therefore, even if the measurement means is also used to determine the release timing in any of the special notification state triggered by the first special information and the special notification state triggered by the second special information, There are no processing problems.

Feature B10. Corresponding to the total number of the first special information and the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the special notification state is set in response to the first special information The number information of the second special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the numerical information is set in the measurement means and the special notification state is set triggered by the second special information. Numerical information setting means (function for executing the processing of step S1909, step S1911, step S2007 and step S2009 in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) for setting numerical information corresponding to
Update in which the numerical information stored in the measuring means is updated by one numerical value when the grant determination is performed in a situation where the special notification state is set or when the determination result is notified. Means (function for executing the process of step S2614 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100);
With
The release means releases the special notification state when the information measured by the measurement means is numerical information corresponding to an initial value. The feature B8 or B9 is characterized in that The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature B10, the measurement means measures whether the special notification state is set by using the first special information or the special notification state is set by using the second special information. By determining whether the set information is numerical information corresponding to the initial value, it is possible to determine whether it is the release timing of the set special notification state. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

  Feature B11. In the case where the special notification state is set when the first special information is triggered, the canceling unit is configured to store the first special stored in the acquired information storage unit when the setting is performed. The special notification state is canceled when the grant determination corresponding to the total number of information and the second special information is performed or when the determination result is notified. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

  The effect of the said characteristic B1 can be show | played.

  Feature B12. In the case where the special notification state is set when the first special information is triggered, the canceling unit is configured to store the first special stored in the acquired information storage unit when the setting is performed. Any of the features B1 to B10, wherein the special notification state is canceled when the grant determination is performed for the number of times corresponding to the number of information or when the determination result is notified A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  The effect of the said characteristic B1 can be show | played.

Feature B13. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operation port 23, lower operation port 24) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is assigned to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Includes a determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means (main control device) for granting a privilege to the player A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the game turn operation is terminated as one game turn, and the game turn operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function to execute variable display control processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 31) ,
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part (upper operating port 23) and a second starting entrance part (lower operating port 24) as the starting entrance part,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start entrance section, and stores in the second start entrance section. Storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to perform the grant determination in order from the second special information acquired previously,
Further, when the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored in the second special information. Priority means (a function for executing data setting processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) so that the above-mentioned grant determination is performed;
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
State setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first setting process and the second setting process in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) When,
In the situation where the special notification state is set, when the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means triggered the setting of the special notification state. Notification control means (display control apparatus 100) for controlling the notification means or a different notification means so as to be executed in a situation in which the game times of the game times prior to the game times related to the special information are being performed. A function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice in the MPU 102),
When the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the number of the special notifications corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. A release means for canceling the special notification state when the game times related to the execution are performed (a function of executing an update process at the start of change in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B13, the first starting entrance part and the second starting entrance part are provided as the starting entrance part, and the special information acquired based on the entrance to the first starting entrance part is While being stored as the first special information, the special information acquired based on the entrance to the second starting entrance portion is stored as the second special information. The second special information is prioritized over the first special information regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of grant determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations will increase the level of attention of the game.

  In addition, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored or stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is a timing before the special notification is the target of the grant determination. May be executed in As a result, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering section and the game that confirms the determination result of the special information acquired based on the game, but at least the acquired information When a plurality of special information is stored in the storage means, confirm the result in the case where the order of the determination of the grant is the target of the grant determination according to the content of the special notification. A game of prediction is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Here, when the setting of the special notification state is performed with the first special information as a trigger, it is assumed that the special notification state continues until the grant determination is performed on the first special information. As described above, the second special information is prioritized in the determination of grant over the first special information, and therefore when the acquisition of the second special information is continued before the first special information is determined to be granted. Therefore, the special notification state will be continued accordingly. Then, it is assumed that the situation set in the special notification state will continue for a long period of time, and even though special notification is made, the player gets used to the special notification more than necessary. There is a risk that the effect of performing the above will not be fully exhibited. On the other hand, when the special notification state is set with the first special information as a trigger, the number of times corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed, Since the special notification state is canceled when the game time related to the execution of the special notification is performed, even if the acquisition of the second special information is continued, the situation set in the special notification state continues for a long period of time. It is suppressed from continuing. Therefore, the above-described effects can be suitably exhibited without causing the above-described disadvantages.

  Note that the configuration limited in any one of the features B2 to B12 may be applied to the feature B13. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

Feature C1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is assigned to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Includes a determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means (main control device) for granting a privilege to the player A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the game turn operation is terminated as one game turn, and the game turn operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function to execute variable display control processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) for controlling the notification means (symbol display device 31) ,
In gaming machines equipped with
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
The special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit is executed by the predetermined notification unit or a different notification unit at a timing before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the grant determination. Notification control means (a function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100),
With
The notification control means is specified based on the fact that the specification is performed by the first specifying means in a predetermined period during the game turning operation when the game turning action is being performed. It is provided with a period corresponding execution means (function to execute the processing for changing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) so that the special notification corresponding to the information is performed by the end timing of the game turning operation. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the characteristic C1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. May be executed in Thereby, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the order of the determination of grant is the target of the grant determination for the later special information. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  Further, when special information is newly acquired in a situation where a game turning operation is being performed, special notification about the special information may be performed by the end timing of the game turning operation. As a result, when special notification is performed, it is possible to shorten the time from when the special information is acquired until the special notification is performed, and the opportunity for the player to confirm the special notification is increased. .

  Furthermore, when the special information is newly acquired in the situation where the game turning operation is being performed and the special notification about the special information is performed by the end timing of the game turning operation, the game turning operation is in progress. In the predetermined period, the special notification is performed. Thereby, in the case where the setting for executing the special notification is performed in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed while the game turning operation is being performed, the complication of the processing can be suppressed.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means (main control device) for granting a privilege to the player A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
In gaming machines equipped with
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
An opportunity information storage means (a function for storing a notice condition establishment flag in the work RAM 104 of the display control device 100) for storing the opportunity information based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result;
In the situation where the opportunity information is stored, a special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means when the opportunity information is stored, and when the opportunity information is stored, A notification control unit (of the display control device 100) that causes the special information that becomes a specific target and triggers the execution of the special notification to be executed by a predetermined notification unit at a timing before the special determination is performed. A function of executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice in the MPU 102 and a function of executing a process during change);
While the trigger information is stored, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification is not set as information that triggers the execution of the special notification. Trigger information regulation means (function to execute the process of step S1709 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) to regulate the
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not subject to the grant determination is before the special information is subject to the grant determination. May be executed in Thereby, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the order of the determination of grant is the target of the grant determination for the later special information. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  Moreover, even if special information is newly stored in a situation where the special notification is already set, the special information is not set to be newly notified. Thereby, the special information that triggers the special notification is not redundantly stored in the acquired information storage means, and the special information that triggers the special notification becomes clear. If special information that triggers special notification is stored redundantly in the acquired information storage means, for example, it is necessary to consider other special information when executing special notification related to one special information. Although it may be complicated, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring by preventing the duplication from occurring.

Feature E1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information.
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function to execute game state transition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
In gaming machines equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the transition determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding advance notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the transition determination;
Notification control means for causing the specific notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means to be executed by the predetermined notification means at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being subject to the transition determination. (A function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 and a function for executing a process for changing);
While the special information corresponding to the migration information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the special information acquired by the information acquisition means after the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Transition information corresponding restriction means (function to execute the processing of step S1706 and step S1708 in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100) for restricting the information from being set as information that triggers the execution of
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic E1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed in Thereby, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the order of the determination of grant is the target of the grant determination for the later special information. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  Further, in a situation where special information corresponding to the migration information is stored, even if special information is newly stored, the special information is not set to be notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transition of the predetermined game state from occurring in the game times related to the special information different from the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification in a situation where the special notification is being executed.

Feature F1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is assigned to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Includes a determination unit for sequentially performing the determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60), and
A privilege granting unit (main control device 60) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 62 of
In gaming machines equipped with
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
State setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result (function for executing the first setting process and the second setting process in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) When,
In the situation set in the special notification state, when the setting is performed, the specific information at the timing before the special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit becomes the target of the determination of the grant Notification control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so as to execute a special notification corresponding to the identification result of the destination specifying means for the target special information (stop corresponding to the hold notice in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) Function to execute the result setting process), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored or stored in the acquired information storage unit and that is not the target of the determination of the grant is more than the special information is the target of the grant determination. May be executed at the previous timing. Thereby, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the order of the determination of the grant is the target of the grant determination for the special information of the later is obtained. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Feature F2. Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the game turn operation is ended so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling predetermined notification means or different notification means (function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function for executing variable display control processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) With
The game time control means is an operation continuation time determining means for determining an operation continuation time in the case where the operation for game play is performed in each game time (a function for executing a variable display time setting process in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60) ), And when the operation for the game times of each game time is performed, the operation for the game times is finally stopped when the operation duration time determined by the operation duration determination means elapses.
The operation duration determining means determines the operation duration of the game times related to the special information that is the start target before the special information that triggered the setting in the situation set in the special notification state. The game according to Feature F1, wherein the operation continuation time is determined without reflecting the determination result in the case where the special information that has become the trigger is the target of the determination of granting Machine.

  According to the feature F2, the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that triggers the setting of the special notification state is the target of the determination of the grant. In the configuration in which the notification can be performed, it is possible to suppress the time required to digest each game time depending on the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature F3. Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the game turn operation is ended so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means for controlling predetermined notification means or different notification means (function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, function for executing variable display control processing in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) With
The game times control means includes
Information on operation duration when the game turning operation is performed is stored in advance, and operation duration information storage means (main control device) stores a plurality of types of information on the operation duration so that each operation duration is different. 60 variable display time table storage area 63c) in ROM 63,
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, or when the game rotation operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, Based on the content of the special information, the operation duration selecting means (selecting one operation duration information from the plurality of types of the operation duration information stored in the operation duration information storage means) The function of executing the setting process of the variable display time in the MPU 62 of the main controller 60),
Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the game turning action is started and selected by the action duration selection means. Operation control means (such as a function for executing variation end processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that finally stops the game turning operation after the operation duration corresponding to the information of the operation duration has elapsed;
With
The operation continuation time selection means determines when the special information that is the subject of the grant determination becomes the subject of the grant determination at a timing later than the special information that is the target of selection of the information of the operation duration The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the information of the operation duration time is selected without reflecting the result.

  According to the feature F3, the operation continuation time in each game time is determined without reflecting the determination result when the special information that triggers the setting of the special notification state is the target of the determination of the grant. In the configuration in which the notification can be performed, it is possible to suppress the time required to digest each game time depending on the content of the special information related to the special notification.

Feature G1. Based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, whether or not to grant a privilege to a player is determined, and the player is granted a privilege based on the result of the determination. Main control means (main control device 60) for
Sub-control means (display control device 100) for controlling predetermined notification means based on the information output from the main control means;
In gaming machines equipped with
The main control means includes
Random number information updating means for updating predetermined random number information (function of executing the process of step S103 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring, as special information, random number information updated by the random number information update means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition; ,
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is assigned to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit Includes a determination unit that sequentially performs the determination of the plurality of pieces of special information (a function of executing variation start processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60);
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means (main control device) for granting the player a privilege A function of executing game state transition processing in 60 MPUs 62),
Information reflecting a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
A result output means (a function of executing a hold command setting process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) that outputs information of the result specified by the destination specifying means to the sub-control means;
With
The sub-control means, based on the information output from the result output means, performs a special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of granting, when the predetermined special information is Notification control means for controlling the predetermined notification means (a stop result setting process corresponding to a hold notice in the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is executed so as to be executed at a timing prior to the assignment determination target. A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

  In the gaming machine of feature G1, special notification corresponding to predetermined special information that is stored or stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to grant determination is subject to grant determination. May be executed at an earlier timing. Thereby, for the player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result of the case where the order of the determination of the grant is the target of the grant determination for the special information of the later is obtained. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the special notification is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the main control unit has a function for executing the grant determination and the like, and the sub-control unit has a function for controlling the predetermined notification unit so as to perform special notification, a function for each control unit And the processing load of the main control means can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the main control means has all functions.

  Furthermore, the main control means does not directly output the special information to the sub-control means when the sub-control means executes the control for performing the special notification, but the special information is subject to the determination of grant. The determination result in the case is specified, and information on the specified result is output to the sub-control means. Therefore, even if information necessary for causing the sub-control unit to execute the control for performing the special notification is illegally acquired in the middle of output from the main control unit to the sub-control unit, for example, The acquired information is not the special information itself but information of the identified result. In gaming machines that perform lottery using random number information, an act of illegally obtaining a privilege by illegally acquiring updated random number information is assumed. In this case, in the configuration in which the special information is output as it is, if the special information is illegally acquired, the currently updated random number information is illegally specified based on the acquired special information. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, since the information of the identified result is output instead of the special information itself, the above-described excellent effect can be achieved while suppressing the possibility of the fraud.

Feature H1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 23, lower operation port 24) provided in the game region and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game region;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
Variable entry means (variable winning device 22) provided in the game area and capable of switching between a first state in which game balls flowing down the game area are easy to enter and a second state in which entry is difficult to enter;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a big winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for executing variable entry control for switching to the second state after the variable entry means is in the first state;
Granting means (payout control device 70, payout device 71) for giving a game ball to a player based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means;
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information.
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function to execute game state transition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
With
The number of times that switching between the first state and the second state is performed in the variable pitching means by the transition of the gaming state to the predetermined gaming state by the state transition unit is a predetermined number of times. In the gaming machine in which the variable entry control is performed until the state is reached, and the transition determination is not performed in the state in which the variable entry control is performed.
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part (upper operating port 23) and a second starting entrance part (lower operating port 24) as the starting entrance part,
An acceptance control means (main control unit) capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easier to enter. A function of executing the electric power support process in the MPU 62 of the control device 60,
The acceptance control means includes a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode, as the control mode of the second starting and entering part. And in the state where the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means, the first mode is set.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination unit performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and the second acquisition information storage unit, and
The special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is more subject to determination by the transition determination unit than the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is the determination target of the transition determination unit. It is configured so that the game result that is advantageous for the player is more likely to occur,
Further, when special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Even if priority means (function to execute the data setting process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) to make the transition determination to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means,
At least in the situation of the second mode, a special notification reflecting a determination result in a case where the predetermined special information stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means is the target of the transition determination, Notification control means for controlling the notification means (corresponding to the hold notice in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100) so that the predetermined special information is executed by the notification means at a timing prior to the transition determination target. Function to execute the stop result setting process),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature H1, at least a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as starting ball entering portions, and the second starting ball entering portion is switched between a non-accepting state and an accepting state. Since it is a structure, a change is given to the entrance mode of a game ball. In this case, in the state where the variable entrance control is performed on the variable entrance means, the first mode is set regardless of which mode the control mode of the second start entrance portion has been before. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of frequent entry into the second starting entry portion in a state where the variable entry control for the variable entry means is performed, and accordingly the exit rate in the state is extremely high. It is suppressed that it becomes high.

  In addition, a first acquisition information storage unit and a second acquisition information storage unit are provided corresponding to each of the first start entrance part and the second start entrance part, and are stored in the first acquisition information storage part. When the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is subject to transition determination, a game result that is more advantageous to the player occurs than when special information that is subject to transition determination is present. It is configured to be easy. Therefore, it is considered that the player plays a game with the expectation of entering the second starting entrance portion of the first starting entrance portion and the second starting entrance portion.

  In particular, the second starting pitching part is switched between a non-accepting state and an accepting state, and the control mode is set to the first mode and the second mode that is more easily accepted. The special information stored in the two acquired information storage means is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquired information storage means regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. This allows the player to perform a launch operation in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance according to the status of the control mode of the second starting entrance, etc., or to the second starting entrance Diversification of expectations for launch operations, such as performing launch operations in anticipation of entering the game, will increase the level of attention of the game.

  Also, the special notification corresponding to the special information that is stored or stored in the second acquisition information storage means and is not subject to the transition determination, the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed by the notification means at the previous timing. Thereby, for the player, not only a game that causes the game ball to enter the starting pitching unit and a game for confirming the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the ball, but at least the second game When multiple pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, check the result when the transition judgment target is the target of the transition judgment, according to the contents of the special notification. A game of playing or guessing is added, and the game is diversified.

  In particular, when the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means is subject to the transition determination as described above, a game result that is more advantageous to the player is more likely to occur, and further, the variable for the variable pitching means is variable. In the state in which the entrance control is performed, the first mode is set to the first mode regardless of which mode the control mode of the second start entrance portion has been before. In such a configuration, when a special notification is made that the predetermined special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means corresponds to the transfer information in the situation of the second mode, the special information The player who has confirmed the notification changes the variable entry control so that the special information stored in the second acquired information storage means becomes the target of the transition determination immediately after the state where the variable entry control is performed is finished. It is considered that as much special information as possible is stored in the second acquired information storage means by causing the second start entering portion to be entered before the state where the starting is performed is started. . In other words, according to this configuration, it is possible to provide a novel game in which an active game in which a launch operation is performed and a passive game in which the result of a transition determination is confirmed are related to each other. It becomes possible to raise the degree of attention.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is set as the structure which performs transfer determination of.

  In addition, the game area includes a lottery opportunity entrance ball portion (through gate 25) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the acceptance control means is configured to enter the lottery opportunity entrance ball portion. Based on the fact that a lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to place the second starting ball-entering part based on the occurrence of a ball has been received, It is good also as a structure which makes a 2nd starting entrance ball part into the said acceptance state. In this case, even if the second mode is set immediately after the state in which the variable pitch control is performed, the second start pitching unit does not enter the accepting state unless the lottery result of the accepting lottery means becomes the acceptance winning. Therefore, before starting the state in which the variable entry control is performed, the entry to the second start entry part is generated, and as much special information as possible is stored in the second acquisition information storage unit. The special advantage of the content that the predetermined special information stored in the second acquired information storage means corresponds to the transfer information in the situation of the second mode is enhanced accordingly. The advantage for the player that notification is performed is enhanced.

Feature I1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (upper operation port 23, lower operation port 24) provided in the game region and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game region;
Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entering section;
Acquisition information storage means (first result display area reservation area Ra, second result display area reservation area Rb) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers, with a predetermined number as an upper limit. )When,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined transfer information and determines whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Includes a transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S801 to S813 in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) for sequentially performing the transition determination on the plurality of special information.
The game state is shifted to a predetermined game state based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transition information. State transition means (function to execute game state transition processing in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60),
In gaming machines equipped with
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part (upper operating port 23) and a second starting entrance part (lower operating port 24) as the starting entrance part,
An acceptance control means (main control unit) capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easier to enter. A function of executing the electric power support process in the MPU 62 of the control device 60,
The acceptance control means includes a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode, as the control mode of the second starting and entering part. And in the state where the variable pitch control is performed by the variable pitch control means, the first mode is set.
The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The transition determination means performs the transition determination for each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means and the second acquisition information storage means,
Further, when special information is stored in the second acquired information storage means, special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored special information is stored in the first acquired information storage means. Even if priority means (function to execute the data setting process in the MPU 62 of the main control device 60) to make the transition determination to the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means,
The special notification reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in or stored in the first acquisition information storage means is the target of the shift determination, the predetermined special information is the transfer determination Notification control means for controlling the notification means so as to be executed by the notification means at a timing prior to the target (function for executing a stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100). When,
In the case of the second mode, notification execution restriction means (for the display control device 100) that restricts execution of the special notification for the predetermined special information stored in or stored in the first acquisition information storage means. The function of executing the process of step S1712 in the MPU 102);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine having the feature I1, the transition determination is performed on the special information stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the gaming state is a predetermined gaming state based on the determination that the special information is the transition information. Migrate to

  In this case, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, and the first acquisition information storage device and the second acquisition information storage device correspond to each of them. Is provided. Then, the special information stored in the second acquisition information storage unit is prioritized over the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit regardless of the acquisition timing of the special information at the time of transition determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations will increase the level of attention of the game.

  In addition, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored or stored in the first acquisition information storage unit and is not subject to the transition determination is before the special information is subject to the transition determination. May be executed at the timing. Thus, for the player, not only a game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering part and a game that confirms the determination result of the transition of the special information acquired based on the game, but at least the first game When multiple pieces of special information are stored in the acquired information storage means, check the result when the transition judgment target is the target of the transition judgment, according to the contents of the special notification. A game of playing or guessing is added, and the game is diversified. Therefore, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, in the second mode in which the second starting ball entering part is likely to be in the receiving state, special notification may be executed for the special information stored in or stored in the first acquisition information storage unit. Limited. In a situation in which entry into the second starting entry portion, which is the priority side at the time of transition determination, is likely to occur, a special notification is issued at a predetermined frequency for the special information stored in or stored in the first acquisition information storage means. Assuming the configuration to be performed, the special starting information for the second starting ball-in part at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being subject to the transition determination, despite the special notification being made about the predetermined special information. It is assumed that the entry continues and the timing at which the predetermined special information related to the special notification becomes the target of the transition determination is delayed with respect to the start timing of the special notification. In that case, for example, it may be difficult to understand which special information is targeted for special notification. On the other hand, in order to clarify it, the notification mode of special notification may be restricted. On the other hand, in the second mode as described above, by restricting the execution of the special notification for the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage unit, the above inconvenience is caused. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the game while suppressing the occurrence.

  From the above, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the game.

  The “predetermined gaming state” is not limited to one type of gaming state, and includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of gaming states are set as the predetermined gaming state, a plurality of types of “transition information” are set, and the “transition determination means” determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to one of the predetermined gaming states. It is preferable to adopt a configuration for performing the shift determination.

  In addition, the “notification execution restriction unit” includes not only the configuration in which the execution of the special notification about the special information stored or stored in the first acquisition information storage unit is disabled in the second mode, but also the first acquisition information. There is also included a configuration in which the execution of the special notification about the special information stored in the storage means is performed less frequently in the second mode than in the first mode. However, when the execution of the special notification is disabled, the special notification is surely restricted for the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means in the situation of the second mode, and the above feature The effect of I1 can be made more remarkable.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably displaying the plurality of pictures based on the operation of the start operation means, and based on the operation of the stop operation means A gaming machine in which variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped and a privilege is given to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 23 ... Upper operation opening as 1st starting entrance part, 24 ... Lower operation opening as 2nd start entrance part, 31 ... Symbol display apparatus as alerting means, 60 ... Main control unit, 62 ... MPU having functions such as transition judging means and priority means, 63 ... ROM, 64 ... RAM, 81 ... game ball launching mechanism as launching means, 100 ... display control device, 102 ... functions such as notification control means and release means 103... Program ROM, 104... Work RAM, 105... VDP, 128... Preservation notice counter area as measuring means, Ra... First holding area for acquisition result storage means, Rb. A reserved area for the second result display section constituting the acquisition information storage means.

Claims (2)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined provision information, it is determined whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Is a grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, it is informed that the operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game operation being ended as one game time. Game times control means for controlling the means;
A period determining means for determining the duration of each game round;
With
In the gaming machine in which the game round ends when the duration determined by the period determining means has elapsed ,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start ball entering section, and a game is stored in the second start ball entering section. Special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the ball enters the ball is stored as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to determine the grant in order from the previously acquired second special information,
The gaming machine is
When the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored. Priority means for making the grant determination,
Information corresponding to a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
A state setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result;
In a situation where the special notification state is set, when the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit is performed when the special notification state is set. Notification control means for causing the special information to be specified by the destination specifying means to be executed at a timing prior to the special information being triggered by the execution of the special notification;
In the case where the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the grant determination for the number of times corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. Canceling means for canceling the special notification state when it is performed or when the determination result is notified;
Equipped with a,
The notification control means is configured to provide a special notification corresponding to the specified information based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying means in a situation where the game turning operation is performed. Execution means to be performed by the end timing of
Even if the special notification is made by the execution means by the end timing of the game turn operation, the duration of the game turn corresponding to the game play operation being executed is not changed. A gaming machine characterized by that. A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting pitching portion provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the start ball entry unit;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
When the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the predetermined provision information, it is determined whether or not a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means Is a grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result in which the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player;
Prior to the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, or based on the determination of the grant by the grant determination means, the game rotation operation is started, and a notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, it is informed that the operation for each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game operation being ended as one game time. Game times control means for controlling the means;
A period determining means for determining the duration of each game round;
With
In the gaming machine in which the game round ends when the duration determined by the period determining means has elapsed,
The game area is provided with at least a first starting entrance part and a second starting entrance part as the starting entrance part,
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the first start ball entering section, and a game is stored in the second start ball entering section. Special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the ball enters the ball is stored as second special information;
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to determine the grant in order from the previously acquired second special information,
The gaming machine is
When the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored. Priority means for making the grant determination,
Information corresponding to a determination result in a case where predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit or stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the grant determination, A destination specifying means for specifying at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination;
A state setting means for setting the special notification state based on the fact that the specific result by the destination specifying means is a predetermined specific result;
In the situation where the special notification state is set, when the special notification state is set, the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means triggered the setting of the special notification state. Notification control means to be executed in a situation in which the game times of the game times prior to the game times related to the special information are being performed;
When the special notification state is set in response to the first special information, the number of the special notifications corresponding to the number of special information already stored when the setting is performed. A release means for canceling the special notification state when a game round related to execution is performed;
With
The notification control means is configured to provide a special notification corresponding to the specified information based on the fact that the specification is performed by the destination specifying means in a situation where the game turning operation is performed. Execution means to be performed by the end timing of
Even if the special notification is made by the execution means by the end timing of the game turn operation, the duration of the game turn corresponding to the game play operation being executed is not changed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images